JP5355759B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To prevent an extreme drop in interest in a game. <P>SOLUTION: When a variable special pattern designation buffer value is "2" by the setting of data 131 for determining a jackpot type, the type of the jackpot is determined to be either a 'first jackpot' or a 'second jackpot'. As a result, the ratio of multi-round decision for controlling to a 15-round jackpot state is made larger than that when the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1". When the type of jackpot is determined to be a "fourth jackpot", the ratio of the normal limited round decision for causing a time-shortening state after controlling to a 2-round jackpot game state is less than that when the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1", or zero. When the type of jackpot is determined to be the 'second jackpot', the ratio of normal multi-round decision for causing the time-shortening state after controlling to the 15-round jackpot game state is made larger than that when the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1". <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2013,JPO&amp;INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, each can be identified based on the fact that a first starting condition is satisfied after a game ball has won a first starting area provided in the gaming area. First variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information and deriving and displaying the display result, and based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied after the game ball has won the second start area provided in the game area A second variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified, and deriving and displaying the display result, and when the display result of the identification information is a predetermined specific display result, The present invention relates to a gaming machine that controls a specific gaming state in which a round game advantageous to a player is executed a predetermined number of times.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. In addition, a variable display device capable of variably displaying identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) when a game ball wins in the winning area (start condition is established) is provided, and the variable display device displays variable display of identification information. Some are configured to be able to be controlled to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the result is a specific display result (big hit symbol). As an example, in a specific gaming state, a special electric combination called a big prize opening or an attacker is opened, and a state where a winning of a game ball is extremely easy (round game) is provided as being continuously executable for a certain period of time.

  In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the end of the specific gaming state, a probability variation gaming state (high probability state) that improves the probability that the display result becomes the specific display result over the normal gaming state (normal probability state), etc. Some are configured to control to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player. This probability variation gaming state ends when a specific condition is satisfied.

  In such a gaming machine, it is proposed that the variable display device performs an effect in which the characters confront each other when in the probability variation gaming state, and notifies that the probability variation gaming state continues or the probability variation gaming state ends by the effect. (For example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-29522 A

  In the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, for example, a normal jackpot gaming state (15 rounds jackpot state) in which the number of round games executed is 15 and the upper limit time for opening the special electric accessory in each round game is 29 seconds. In addition, the big hit gaming state (for example, 0.5 seconds) in which the upper limit time for opening the special electric accessory in each round game with a small number of times (for example, two times) is short (for example, 0.5 seconds). It is conceivable to provide a state of 2 round big hits). In this case, there is a low possibility that a game ball will win a special electric accessory when a big hit state is made for two rounds, and the interest of the game may be extremely reduced because the player cannot obtain a prize ball. was there.

  This invention is made in view of the said actual condition, and it aims at providing the gaming machine which prevents the extreme fall of game entertainment attraction.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a game ball wins in a first start area provided in the game area (for example, a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A). After that, a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, the first special figure) that can be identified based on the fact that the first start condition (for example, No is determined in step S236) is established. First variable display means for deriving and displaying the display result (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A) and the second start area provided in the game area (for example, the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B) A plurality of types of identification information (for example, the second special figure), each of which can be identified based on the fact that the second start condition (for example, No is determined in step S231) is established after the game ball is won. Such) A second variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 4B) for performing variable display and deriving and displaying the display result; and a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) in which the display result of the identification information is predetermined. A game machine (for example, pachinko game machine 1 or the like) that is controlled to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state or the like) that executes a round game advantageous to the player a predetermined number of times, and a predetermined start condition is satisfied Based on the above, normal variable display means (for example, the normal symbol display 20) for variably displaying a plurality of types of ordinary identification information each identifiable and deriving and displaying the display result, and the display result of the ordinary identification information are A variable prize that changes the second starting area from a first state in which a game ball is difficult to win to a second state in which a game ball is easy to win when a predetermined display result is obtained. Control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the normal electric accessory actuating process in step S144) and a variable display in which the first start condition is not yet satisfied even though a game ball has won the first start area. First hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 151A, etc.) for storing the hold storage information within a predetermined upper limit storage number, and the game ball is still won in the second starting area A second hold storage means (for example, the second special figure hold storage unit 151B) that stores the variable display hold storage information for which the second start condition is not satisfied within a predetermined upper limit storage number; and the specific game As the state, specific game state control means (for example, the processing of steps S247, S114, S116, and S117) for controlling any of a plurality of types of specific game states having different degrees of advantage for the player is executed. And the like, and whether to control to the specific gaming state based on the holding storage information read from the first holding storage means or the second holding storage means, and when controlling to the specific gaming state Predetermining means for determining which of the plurality of types of specific gaming states is controlled before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps S235, S240, S242 to S246) And variable display time determination means (for example, steps S272 to S277) for determining the variable display time of the identification information in the first variable display means or the second variable display means based on the determination result of the prior determination means. CPU 103 for executing the above process) and the variable display of the identification information in the first variable display means Variable display control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the processing of steps S231 to S240) that preferentially executes variable display of the identification information in the second variable display means, and the second start area after the end of the specific gaming state Advantageous state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the normal symbol determination process of step S141 after executing the processes of steps S325, S327, and S328) that controls the advantageous state that tends to become the second state at a predetermined rate. And when the pre-determining means decides to control the specific gaming state based on the reserved storage information read from the second reserved storage means, based on the reserved storage information read from the first reserved storage means The plurality of types of specific game states at a higher rate than when it is decided to control to a specific game state. Among these, the variable display time determining means decides to control the variable display time of the identification information in the first variable display means when the player is in the advantageous state. , A time longer than the variable display time of the normal identification information in the normal variable display means when not in the advantageous state is determined, and when in the advantageous state, the hold storage information is stored in the second hold storage means If the storage information is stored in the first storage means, the variable display time of the identification information in the first variable display means is changed to the variable display time of the identification information in the second variable display means. The advantageous state control means decides the advantageous state by improving the probability that the display result of the normal identification information becomes the predetermined display result. Control.
In such a configuration, it is controlled to the advantageous state by improving the probability that the display result of the normal identification information becomes the predetermined display result, and the specific gaming state is controlled based on the hold storage information read from the second hold storage means. Then, when it is determined, it is controlled to a specific gaming state having a higher advantage for the player at a higher rate than when it is determined to control to the specific gaming state based on the holding storage information read from the first holding storage means. It is possible to prevent an extreme decline in the game entertainment interest.

(2) Note that the gaming machine according to another aspect is the first after the game ball has won the first start area provided in the game area (for example, the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A). Based on the establishment of the start condition (for example, “No” in step S236), a plurality of types of identification information (for example, the first special figure) that can each be identified are variably displayed and the display result is derived. The first variable display means for displaying (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A) and the second start area provided in the game area (for example, the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B) Variable of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, the second special figure) that can be identified based on the fact that the second start condition (for example, determined as No in step S231) is established after the ball has won. Display and table A second variable display means for deriving and displaying the result (for example, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc.), and when the display result of the identification information is a predetermined specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol), A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that controls a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state or the like) in which a round game advantageous for a player is executed a predetermined number of times, wherein the first starting area and the second starting area Whether or not to control to the specific gaming state based on the winning of a game ball in any of the above, and when the specific gaming state is controlled, after the specific gaming state is finished, the specific gaming state is further entered It is determined before the display result of the identification information is derived whether or not the special gaming state (for example, probability variation state) in which the probability is improved over the normal gaming state (for example, normal state). Pre-determining means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S235, S240, S242 to S246) and a game ball is placed in a specific area provided in the game area in the round game executed in the specific game state A payout control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the award ball processing in step S18) that controls the payout operation of the game ball based on winning, and the pre-determining means in the specific gaming state When it is decided to control, a round game of the first number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) is executed, and after the specific game state is ended, a multi-round special specific game state (for example, jackpot type) that shifts to the special game state And the second round number less than the first round number (example) For example, a round game of 2 rounds is executed, and after the specific game state is finished, the small round special specific game state (for example, the big hit game when the big hit type is “third big hit”) is shifted to the special game state. State, etc.) and the round game of the first round number is executed, and after the specific game state is finished, the multi-round non-special game state (for example, the big hit type is “second big hit” that does not shift to the special game state). ) And the second round number of round games are executed, and after the specific game state is finished, the small round non-special game state (for example, which does not shift to the special game state) It is determined which specific gaming state to use (for example, the CPU 103) from the jackpot gaming state when the jackpot type is “fourth jackpot”, etc. The processing of steps S244 to S246 is executed), and the payout control means changes from the normal gaming state to the small round non-special gaming state when the special gaming state is controlled to the small round non-special gaming state. You may comprise so that payout control of the game ball used as the 2nd prize ball number (for example, 30 pieces) larger than the 1st prize ball number (for example, 15 pieces) at the time of being controlled may be performed.
In such a configuration, when the special game state is controlled to the non-special game state with a small number of rounds, the normal game state is determined based on the fact that the game ball is won in a specific area provided in the game area in the round game. The payout control of the game balls having the second number of prize balls larger than the number of the first prize balls when controlled to the small round non-special game state is performed. Therefore, when the special gaming state ends from the special gaming state in the small round non-special specific gaming state, by winning the game ball in the specific area in the round game in the small round non-special specific gaming state, The player can receive a payout of game balls having a second number of prize balls larger than the number of first prize balls. Thereby, when a special game state is complete | finished, the extreme fall of game entertainment can be prevented and game entertainment can be improved.

(3) A gaming machine according to still another aspect starts first after a game ball has won a first start area provided in the game area (for example, a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A). Based on the establishment of a condition (for example, “No” in step S236), a plurality of types of identification information (for example, the first special figure) that can be individually identified are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed. Game balls in the first variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A) and the second start area provided in the game area (for example, the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B). Variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, the second special figure) that can be identified based on the fact that the second start condition (for example, No is determined in step S231) is established after winning Do the table A second variable display means for deriving and displaying the result (for example, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc.), and when the display result of the identification information is a predetermined specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol), A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that controls a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state or the like) in which a round game advantageous for a player is executed a predetermined number of times, wherein the first starting area and the second starting area Whether or not to control to the specific gaming state based on the winning of a game ball in any of the above, and when the specific gaming state is controlled, after the specific gaming state is finished, the specific gaming state is further entered Prior determination means (for example, CPU 10) for determining whether or not the special gaming state in which the probability is improved from the normal gaming state is determined before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed. When the round game of each time executed in the specific game state is started, the specific area provided in the game area is played by the game. When the round game ends after the first state where the ball is difficult to win (for example, the closed state) is changed to the second state where the game ball is easy to win (for example, the open state), the specific area is A round game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S114 to S116) for changing from the second state to the first state, and the predetermining means controls to the specific game state. When determined, a round game of the first round number (for example, 15 rounds) is executed, and after the specific game state is over, the special game state is entered. A multi-round special specific game state (for example, a big hit game state when the big hit type is “first big hit”) and a second round number (for example, two rounds) smaller than the first round number are executed. Then, after the specific gaming state is finished, the small round special specific gaming state (for example, the big hit gaming state when the big hit type is “third big hit”) that shifts to the special gaming state, and the first round After a certain number of round games have been executed and the specific game state has ended, a multi-round non-special game state that does not shift to the special game state (for example, a big hit game state when the big hit type is “second big hit”, etc. ) And the second round number of round games are executed, and after the specific game state is completed, the small round non-special The specific game state (for example, the big hit game state when the big hit type is “fourth big hit”, etc.) is determined (for example, the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S244 to S246). When the round game control means is controlled from the special game state to the small round non-special game state, the round game control means is the first when the normal game state is controlled to the small round non-special game state. The second area (for example, 10 seconds) longer than the period (for example, 0.5 seconds) may be set as the upper limit period, and the specific area may be controlled to the second state in each round game.
In such a configuration, when the special gaming state is controlled to the low round non-special gaming state, the second period is longer than the first period when the normal gaming state is controlled to the small round non-special gaming state. Is set as the upper limit period, the specific area is controlled to the second state advantageous to the player in each round game. Therefore, when the special gaming state ends when the special gaming state is changed to a non-special gaming state with a small number of rounds, a game ball is awarded to a specific area in each round game in the non-special gaming state with a small number of rounds. And the payout of the game ball as the prize ball can be received. Thereby, when a special game state is complete | finished, the extreme fall of game entertainment can be prevented and game entertainment can be improved.

(4) A gaming machine according to another aspect of the invention starts first after a game ball has won a first start area provided in the game area (for example, a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A). Based on the establishment of a condition (for example, “No” in step S236), a plurality of types of identification information (for example, the first special figure) that can be individually identified are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed. Game balls in the first variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A) and the second start area provided in the game area (for example, the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B). Variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, the second special figure) that can be identified based on the fact that the second start condition (for example, No is determined in step S231) is established after winning Do the table A second variable display means for deriving and displaying the result (for example, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc.), and when the display result of the identification information is a predetermined specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol), A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that controls a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state or the like) in which a round game advantageous for a player is executed a predetermined number of times, wherein the first starting area and the second starting area Whether or not to control to the specific gaming state based on the winning of a game ball in any of the above, and when the specific gaming state is controlled, after the specific gaming state is finished, the specific gaming state is further entered Prior determination means (for example, CPU 10) for determining whether or not the special gaming state in which the probability is improved from the normal gaming state is determined before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed. Priority is given to the variable display of the identification information in the second variable display means over the variable display of the identification information in the first variable display means), etc., where the processing of steps S235, S240, S242 to S246 is performed) Variable display control means to be executed (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S236 to S240 based on the determination of Yes in step S231) and a first state in which the game ball is difficult to win in the second starting area (for example, Variable winning control means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S140 to S144) that changes between a normal opening state or a closed state) and a second state where the game ball is easy to win (for example, an expanded opening state or an opening state). Etc.), and the pre-determining means has decided to control to the specific gaming state At the same time, after the round game of the first round number (for example, 15 rounds) is executed and the specific game state ends, the multi-round special specific game state (for example, the big hit type is “first game type” that shifts to the special game state). A big hit game state when the game is “big hit”) and a second round number game (for example, two rounds) smaller than the first round number, and after the specific game state ends, the special game state After a special game state with a small number of rounds (for example, a big hit game state when the jackpot type is “3rd big hit”) and the round game of the first number of rounds is executed, Is a multi-round non-special gaming state that does not shift to the special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state when the jackpot type is “second jackpot”), and After the round game of the second round number is executed and the specific game state ends, the small round non-special game state that does not shift to the special game state (for example, when the big hit type is “fourth big hit”) (Such as a big hit game state) is determined (for example, the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S244 to S246), the variable winning control means is at least the special game state Sometimes, the second start area is changed to the second state at a high frequency (for example, the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S140 to S144 using the general-purpose display result determination data 139), and the prior determination means Is a special transition ratio, which is a ratio of transitioning to the special gaming state after completion of the specific gaming state, so that a game ball enters the first starting area. And when it is decided to control to the specific gaming state based on the fact that it is determined to control to the specific gaming state based on winning the game ball in the second starting area, 2 is a ratio to be determined as either the multi-round special specific gaming state or the multi-round non-special specific gaming state when it is determined to control to the specific gaming state based on the winning of a game ball in the starting area The multi-round determination ratio is larger than the multi-round determination ratio when it is determined to control to the specific gaming state based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting area, and is determined to be the small round non-special specific gaming state. A small round non-special determination ratio, which is a ratio to be determined, is determined to be controlled to the specific gaming state based on a winning game ball in the first starting area It is configured to determine which specific gaming state is set to be less than the small round non-special determination ratio (for example, the CPU 103 determines the big hit type using the big hit type determination data 131). Also good. The pre-determining means is a ratio for determining the multi-round non-special specific gaming state when it is determined to control the specific gaming state based on winning of the game ball in the second starting area. Any specific number is set so that the multi-round non-special determination rate is higher than the multi-round non-special determination rate when it is determined to control to the specific gaming state based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting area. It may be determined whether to enter a gaming state. Further, the fact that the small round non-special determination ratio is reduced is a concept including that the determination ratio becomes zero.
In such a configuration, the multi-round special specific gaming state and the multi-round non-special specific gaming state when it is determined to control to the specific gaming state based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting area. The multi-round determination ratio, which is the ratio to be determined, is higher than the multi-round determination ratio when it is determined to control to the specific gaming state based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting area, and the small round non-special specific gaming state The small round non-special determination ratio, which is the ratio to be determined in the first round, is smaller than the small round non-special determination ratio when it is determined to control to the specific gaming state based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting area. Which specific gaming state is set is determined. Further, the special transition ratio, which is the ratio of transitioning to the special gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state, is determined to be controlled to the specific gaming state based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting area, This is the same as when it is decided to control to the specific gaming state based on the winning of the game ball in the starting area, and at least when it is in the special gaming state, the second starting area changes to the second state with high frequency. Therefore, when in the special gaming state, the possibility of the special gaming state ending is reduced by entering the small round non-special gaming state, and the number of rounds is more than the second round by entering the non-special gaming state. It is possible to increase the possibility that the special game state is ended by executing the round game of the first round number. Thereby, when a special game state is complete | finished, the extreme fall of game entertainment can be prevented and game entertainment can be improved.

(5) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (4), the identification information is variably displayed on the basis of the fact that the pre-determining means has decided not to control the specific gaming state. Reach determination means for determining whether or not the state is set to a predetermined reach state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S265 to S269), and a determination result by the prior determination means and the reach determination means The variation pattern type determining means for determining the variation pattern type of the identification information as one of a plurality of types (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S264 and S270 to S273) and the variation pattern type determining means A variation pattern of the identification information is determined from variation patterns included in the determined variation pattern type. Dynamic pattern determining means (e.g. CPU103 portions such as to perform the processing of step S274～S276) may be configured to and a.
In such a configuration, the variation pattern type of the identification information is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the determination results by the prior determination unit and the reach determination unit, and among the variation patterns included in the determined variation pattern type. From this, the variation pattern of the identification information is determined. This makes it easy to change the variation pattern type and variation pattern, and to set random number distribution at the time of addition, and can relax restrictions when setting the appearance rate of effects corresponding to the variation pattern.

(6) In any of the above gaming machines (2) to (5), a plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, each of which can be identified in synchronization with the first variable display means or the second variable display means) Decoration variable display means (for example, a display area of the image display device 5) that variably displays a display result and displays the display result, and the advance determination means determine that the game state is not controlled to the specific gaming state. Based on the above, reach determination means for determining whether or not the variable display state of the identification information is set to a predetermined reach state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S265 to S269), the multi-round When the transition to the special game state is made after the special specific game state is finished, the same background or character image is displayed over a plurality of variable displays in the decoration variable display means. Specific effect mode control means for controlling to a specific effect mode (for example, a battle mode) in which an effect is continuously executed (for example, the CPU 103 is the process of step S329 and the jackpot type is “first” based on the mode flag switching setting data 200). A portion that switches the mode flag to “1” corresponding to “big hit”), and enters the special game state after the small round non-special game state is finished during the small round non-special game state during the specific effect mode. If the transition is not made, a predetermined mode end effect (for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 62 (1) to (5) in the image display device 5) is executed to control the specific effect mode to the special effect mode (for example, the chance mode). Special effect mode control means (for example, the CPU 103 performs mode flag switching setting data in the process of step S329). Based on the data 200, the current mode is “battle mode” and the big hit type is “the fourth big hit” and the mode flag is switched to “2”), and the reach determining means is in the specific effect mode In this case, it may be determined that the reach state is not necessarily set (for example, the determination is made without reach based on the reach determination data 132B).
In such a configuration, when it is determined that the game state is not controlled during the specific effect mode, it is determined that the reach state is not necessarily set. As a result, the processing load in the reach determination and the variation pattern determination in the specific effect mode can be reduced, and the variable display time of the identification information is prolonged even though the specific game state is not set in the specific effect mode. It is possible to prevent the gaming interest from deteriorating.

(7) In any one of the above gaming machines (2) to (5), a plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, each of which can be identified in synchronization with the first variable display means or the second variable display means) Decoration variable display means (for example, display area of the image display device 5) for variably displaying the display result and displaying the display result, and after the multi-round special specific gaming state has been finished, the special gaming state has been entered Sometimes, the specific effect mode control means (for example, the CPU 103) controls to the specific effect mode (for example, battle mode) in which the effect by the same background or character image is continuously executed over the variable display of the decoration variable display means a plurality of times. In step S329, the mode flag is set to “1” corresponding to the first jackpot type based on the mode flag switching setting data 200. A portion to be switched), and when the low-round non-special game state is entered during the specific effect mode and the transition to the special game state is not made after the low-round non-special game state ends, a predetermined mode end effect (for example, 62 (1) to (5) in the image display device 5 are executed to control from the specific effect mode to the special effect mode (for example, the chance mode) (for example, the CPU 103 performs step). In the process of S329, based on the mode flag switching setting data 200, the current mode is “battle mode” and the big hit type is “fourth big hit” and the mode flag is changed to “2”), and the specific effect The special game state is set to the special game state in the small round during the mode, and after the special game state in the small round is completed. When shifting to, a predetermined mode continuation effect (for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 57 (B) and (C) in the image display device 5, FIGS. 60 (11) and (12), FIG. 61 (1) and ( 2), the effect shown in FIGS. 63 (1) and 63 (2)) is executed to continue the specific effect mode, and the mode end effect is executed to control the special effect mode. Of these, the second special effect mode control means for selectively executing one of them (for example, the CPU 103 performs the process of step S329 based on the mode flag switching setting data 200, the current mode is “battle mode”, and the big hit type is “first”). (The part where the mode flag is switched to “1” or “2” corresponding to “3 big hits”), and when the variable display is executed by the first variable display means in the specific effect mode, Different display modes when the variable display is executed by the second variable display means (for example, the display mode as shown in FIG. 60 (2) when variable display is executed by the first special symbol display device 4A, When variable display is executed by the second special symbol display device 4B, specific effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for the effect control CPU 120 performs the battle effect in step S523) that can execute the effect by the effect mode as shown in FIG. 60 (4). And a portion for executing the process of S162 based on the effect control pattern determined in the setting process).
In such a configuration, in the specific effect mode, the effect is executed in different effect modes when the variable display is executed by the first variable display means and when the variable display is executed by the second variable display means. It becomes possible. Then, a multi-round determination ratio for determining one of the multi-round special specific gaming state and the multi-round non-special specific gaming state based on the winning of the gaming ball in the second starting area, and the gaming ball in the first starting area If it differs from the multi-round decision ratio based on winning, the first round number will be changed to the multi-round special specific gaming state or the multi-round non-special specific gaming state depending on the presentation mode executed during variable display. It becomes possible to recognize the possibility that a round game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(8) In any one of the above gaming machines (2) to (5), a plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, each of which can be identified in synchronization with the first variable display means or the second variable display means (for example, Decoration variable display means (for example, display area of the image display device 5) for variably displaying the display result and displaying the display result, and after the multi-round special specific gaming state has been finished, the special gaming state has been entered Sometimes, the specific effect mode control means (for example, the CPU 103) controls to the specific effect mode (for example, battle mode) in which the effect by the same background or character image is continuously executed over the variable display of the decoration variable display means a plurality of times. In step S329, the mode flag is set to “1” corresponding to the first jackpot type based on the mode flag switching setting data 200. And the small-round non-special game when the small-round non-special game state is ended during the specific effect mode and the small-round non-special game state ends and does not shift to the special game state. When a predetermined number of variable displays are executed in the decoration variable display means after the state is finished, the specific effect mode end control means for ending the specific effect mode (for example, the CPU 103 sets the mode flag switching setting in step S312). And a portion for switching the mode flag to “0” based on the data 202).
In such a configuration, when the small round non-special game state is entered during the specific effect mode and the small round non-special game state ends and the game does not enter the special game state, a predetermined number of variable displays are executed. If it does, the specific effect mode is terminated. Thereby, even after the special gaming state ends, the specific effect mode can be continued and the player's expectation can be maintained. Further, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped when the special game state ends.

(9) In any one of the above gaming machines (2) to (5), a plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, each of which can be identified in synchronization with the first variable display means or the second variable display means) Decoration variable display means (for example, a display area of the image display device 5) for variably displaying a decorative pattern or the like and displaying a display result, and when the special game state is not completed and the special game state is not shifted to The time reduction control means (for example, the CPU 103 performs step S315) that performs time reduction control for reducing the variable display time from the start of variable display of the identification information to the display display of the display result with the predetermined variable display count as the upper limit count. , After executing any one of the processes of S317, etc., the part for executing the processes of steps S273, S276, etc.), and the time reduction control means includes the special gaming state If the low-round non-special gaming state is entered when the time reduction control is being performed, or if the low-round non-special gaming state is in the normal gaming state, The time reduction control is performed after the small round non-special game state is ended, with the number of variable display times being the upper limit number of times than in the case (for example, the CPU 103 sets the first time limit upper limit number in the process of step S325). On the other hand, in step S327, a part for setting the second time limit upper limit number).
In such a configuration, when the game is in the special game state, or when the time reduction control is being performed, when the low round non-special game state is entered, the game is less in the normal game state. The time reduction control is performed after the small round non-special game state is ended, with the number of variable display times being the upper limit number of times, compared to the case where the round non-special game state is entered. This reduces the disadvantages experienced by the player when the special gaming state or the time reduction control is performed and the player enters the small round non-special gaming state, and when the special gaming state ends, Can be prevented from extremely decreasing.

(10) In any one of the above gaming machines (2) to (5), a plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, each of which can be identified in synchronization with the first variable display means or the second variable display means) Decoration variable display means (for example, display area of the image display device 5) for variably displaying the display result and displaying the display result, and after the multi-round special specific gaming state has been finished, the special gaming state has been entered Sometimes, the specific effect mode control means (for example, the CPU 103) controls to the specific effect mode (for example, battle mode) in which the effect by the same background or character image is continuously executed over the variable display of the decoration variable display means a plurality of times. In step S329, the mode flag is set to “1” corresponding to the first jackpot type based on the mode flag switching setting data 200. And when the small round non-special game state is entered during the specific effect mode and the transition to the special game state is not made after the small round non-special game state ends, a predetermined mode end effect ( For example, specific effect mode ending means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the process of step S329 for mode flag switching setting) that executes the effects shown in FIGS. 62 (1) to (5) in the image display device 5 and ends the specific effect mode. Based on the data 200, the current mode is “battle mode” and the big hit type is “fourth big hit” and the mode flag is switched to “2”), and before the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state The notice effect execution means for executing the notice effect for notifying the possibility of becoming (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs steps S591 to S59. And the operation means (for example, the operation button 30) that can be operated by the player, and the notice effect executing means performs the operation of the operation means. Correspondingly, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of notice effects that change the effect mode (for example, a portion for executing effects shown in FIGS. 66 (2) to (6) in the image display device 5).
In such a configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of notice effects that change the appearance mode corresponding to the operation of the operation means as the notice effects for notifying the possibility of entering the specific game state before entering the specific game state. is there. Thereby, while raising the expectation which will be in a specific game state, the presentation effect by a notice effect can be heightened, and a game interest can be improved.

(11) In any one of the above gaming machines (2) to (5), a plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, each of which can be identified in synchronization with the first variable display means or the second variable display means) Decoration variable display means (for example, display area of the image display device 5) for variably displaying the display result and displaying the display result, and after the multi-round special specific gaming state has been finished, the special gaming state has been entered Sometimes, the specific effect mode control means (for example, the CPU 103) controls to the specific effect mode (for example, battle mode) in which the effect by the same background or character image is continuously executed over the variable display of the decoration variable display means a plurality of times. In the process of step S329, the current mode is other than “battle mode” and the jackpot type is “first” based on the mode flag switching setting data 200. The mode flag is switched to “1” corresponding to “win”), and the multi-round special specific gaming state is entered during the specific effect mode, and the special gaming state is shifted to after the multi-round special specific gaming state ends. In such a case, the specific effect mode continuation means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a step), which executes a predetermined mode continuation effect (for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 57B and 57C in the image display device 5) and continues the specific effect mode. The part in which the current mode is “battle mode” and the big hit type is “first big hit” and the mode flag is maintained at “1” based on the mode flag switching setting data 200 in the process of S329), and the specific effect During the mode, the small round non-special gaming state is entered, and after the small round non-special gaming state ends, the special gaming state is not entered. In such a case, a first special effect mode control for executing a predetermined mode end effect (for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 62 (1) to (5) in the image display device 5) and controlling the specific effect mode to the special effect mode. Means (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 switches the mode flag to “2” corresponding to the “battle mode” and the big hit type “fourth big hit” based on the mode flag switching setting data 200 in the processing of step S329. ), And when the small round special specific gaming state is entered during the specific rendering mode and the transition to the special gaming state occurs after the small round special specific gaming state ends, the mode continuation rendering is executed to execute the specific rendering. Either the mode is continued or the mode end effect is executed and the special effect mode is controlled. The second special effect mode control means to be executed (for example, the mode flag corresponding to the current mode is “battle mode” and the big hit type is “third big hit” based on the mode flag switching setting data 200 by the CPU 103 in step S329) And the second special effect mode control means is controlled by the specific effect mode control means to the specific effect mode and then the specific effect mode continuation means. A ratio between a ratio of executing the mode continuation effect to continue the specific effect mode and a ratio of executing the mode end effect and controlling to the special effect mode according to the number of times the specific effect mode is continued. (For example, when the CPU 103 determines that the big hit type is “third big hit” in step S273, If it is 2, 5, or 8 times, it is determined as a variation pattern type of battle mode fall based on the data pattern for determining the variation pattern type for big hit 133I, and if the number of battle wins is other than 2, 5, or 8 times, the variation for big hit It may be configured such that the variation pattern for continuing the battle mode is determined based on the pattern type determination data 133H).
In such a configuration, a predetermined mode continuation effect corresponding to the number of times that the specific effect mode is continued by the specific effect mode continuation means by entering the multi-round special specific game state after being controlled to the specific effect mode. And the ratio of continuing the specific effect mode and the ratio of executing the mode end effect and controlling to the special effect mode are made different. As a result, it is possible to produce a distinctive effect by the number of continuations of the specific production mode corresponding to the number of times of the multi-round special specific game state, and when playing for a long time (when the special game state continues) Can be improved.

(12) In any one of the above gaming machines (2) to (5), a plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, each of which can be identified in synchronization with the first variable display means or the second variable display means) Decoration variable display means (for example, display area of the image display device 5) for variably displaying the display result and displaying the display result, and after the multi-round special specific gaming state has been finished, the special gaming state has been entered Sometimes, the specific effect mode control means (for example, the CPU 103) controls to the specific effect mode (for example, battle mode) in which the effect by the same background or character image is continuously executed over the variable display of the decoration variable display means a plurality of times. In the process of step S329, the current mode is other than “battle mode” and the jackpot type is “first” based on the mode flag switching setting data 200. The mode flag is switched to “1” corresponding to “win”), and the multi-round special specific gaming state is entered during the specific effect mode, and the special gaming state is shifted to after the multi-round special specific gaming state ends. In such a case, the specific effect mode continuation means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a step), which executes a predetermined mode continuation effect (for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 57B and 57C in the image display device 5) and continues the specific effect mode. The part in which the current mode is “battle mode” and the big hit type is “first big hit” and the mode flag is maintained at “1” based on the mode flag switching setting data 200 in the process of S329), and the specific effect During the mode, the small round non-special gaming state is entered, and after the small round non-special gaming state ends, the special gaming state is not entered. In such a case, a first special effect mode control for executing a predetermined mode end effect (for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 62 (1) to (5) in the image display device 5) and controlling the specific effect mode to the special effect mode. Means (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 switches the mode flag to “2” corresponding to the “battle mode” and the big hit type “fourth big hit” based on the mode flag switching setting data 200 in the processing of step S329. ), And when the small round special specific gaming state is entered during the specific rendering mode and the transition to the special gaming state occurs after the small round special specific gaming state ends, the mode continuation rendering is executed to execute the specific rendering. Either the mode is continued or the mode end effect is executed and the special effect mode is controlled. The second special effect mode control means to be executed (for example, the mode flag corresponding to the current mode is “battle mode” and the big hit type is “third big hit” based on the mode flag switching setting data 200 by the CPU 103 in step S329) And “1” or “2”) and the number of times the specific effect mode is continued by the specific effect mode continuation means after being controlled to the specific effect mode by the specific effect mode control means. The specific effect mode executing means for executing the effect in the specific effect mode by changing the background or the character image used in the effect in the specific effect mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of steps S583 and S585. Part).
In such a configuration, after being controlled to the specific effect mode, in the specific effect mode corresponding to the number of times that the specific effect mode is continued by the specific effect mode continuation means by becoming a multi-round special specific game state. An effect in the specific effect mode is executed by changing the background or character image used in the effect. As a result, it is possible to produce a distinctive effect by the number of continuations of the specific production mode corresponding to the number of times of the multi-round special specific game state, and when playing for a long time (when the special game state continues) Can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of production | presentation mode transfer. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data for special figure display result determination. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data for jackpot classification determination. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data for reach determination. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data for fluctuation pattern classification determination. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data for fluctuation pattern classification determination. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data for fluctuation pattern classification determination. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data for fluctuation pattern classification determination. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data for fluctuation pattern determination. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data for fluctuation pattern determination. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data for fluctuation pattern determination. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data for fluctuation pattern determination. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data for general map display result determination. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data for final stop symbol determination. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data for right / left appearance determination. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data for reach design determination. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data for jackpot symbol determination. It is a figure showing an example of composition of notice selection data. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an effect control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an effect control pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data holding area for production control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a figure which shows the selection setting of the data for a variation pattern classification determination. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a figure which shows an example of the data for mode flag switching setting. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pending | holding memory increase display process. It is a figure which shows the operation example in a pending | holding memory | storage display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation start command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a reach design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control pattern determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect setting process. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of battle production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control command processing. It is a figure which shows the reach production of each reach aspect. It is a figure which shows the display of each main designation | designated effect. It is a figure which shows the display of each main designation | designated effect. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the reach determined that it becomes a big hit by the reach design. It is a timing chart which shows the example of change operation of various symbols. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the background in the image display apparatus in battle mode. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a friend character and an enemy character. It is a figure for demonstrating other examples of effect mode transfer. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data for battle production pattern classification determination. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data for battle production pattern determination. It is the flowchart etc. which show another example of battle production setting processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a timing chart for explaining switching of effects. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the selection setting of the data for a variation pattern classification determination in a modification. It is a figure which shows the structure of the variation pattern determination data for non-reach loss in the modification. It is a figure which shows structures, such as various control boards in a modification.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). A special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed is variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. There is no limitation, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a variable display section divided into a plurality of parts such as three, decorative symbols which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) each identifiable are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In response to the start of either the first special symbol change by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol change by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special game, ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas are movable within the display area of the image display device 5 so that the decorative symbols can be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner. May be. As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified are displayed in a variable manner, and a finalized decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese Numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. For example, it may be a decoration image showing a person, an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure. In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a blank symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  During the change of the decorative symbol, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from the smallest to the largest symbol number, sequentially from the top to the bottom. When the scrolling display is performed and the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  In addition, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the holding of the variable display is based on the fact that the game ball has entered (starting winning) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B. The start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative design is established, but the variable display game based on the start condition established previously is being executed. This occurs when the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, the start winning memory display area 5 H has a plurality of display colors that are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is first established based on the occurrence of the start winning. The display part is provided. When the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established based on the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the One of the display parts that are displayed (transparent color) (for example, the leftmost display part among the non-displayed display parts) is changed to blue display. Further, when a special ball game start condition (second start condition) using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established based on the game ball entering the second start winning opening, it is normally not One of the displayed display parts is changed to a red display. Thereafter, when one of the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure and the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, for example, The display at the leftmost display part is removed and the display at each display part is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part whose display color has changed) returns to non-display. Here, in this embodiment, when performing the hold memory display, the number of special figure hold memories based on the establishment of the variable display game start condition can be specified, but the start condition is the first start condition. When it is not possible to specify whether the condition is the second start condition, the display mode of the special figure reserved memory number is changed to a predetermined display mode, for example, by changing the number of display parts corresponding to the special figure reserved memory number to gray. change.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a changing special figure display area 5I is provided on the left side of the start winning storage display area 5H. For example, during the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A based on the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the changing special figure display area 5I is displayed in blue. Display. Further, during the execution of the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B based on the game ball entering the second start winning opening, the changing symbol display area 5I is displayed in red. To do. That is, when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the display removed from the start winning memory display area 5H is displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. By the display of the changing special symbol display area 5I, the player can grasp which of the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is executing the special symbol game.

  Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 1, the number of special figure reservation memory | storages is displayed in the upper part of the 1st special symbol display apparatus 4A and the 2nd special symbol display apparatus 4B with the start winning memory | storage display area 5H so that identification is possible. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator LED 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A so as to be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the second start winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has, for example, a number (for example, four) of LEDs corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. It is comprised including.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a change start hold number display area 5 </ b> A is arranged. The change start hold number display area 5A displays a number indicating the number of special figure hold storage at the start of change of the special figure game according to the first special figure or the second special figure. In this embodiment, the total number of reserved memories, which is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, is displayed. By displaying the change start hold number display area 5A, the player or the like can recognize the special figure hold storage number at the start of the change of the special figure game.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilted position by a predetermined solenoid for a normal electric accessory (normally A second start winning opening is provided. As an example, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball does not easily enter the second start winning opening. It becomes a state. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball can easily enter the second starting winning hole by tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the normal electric accessory solenoid is on. It becomes an open state. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, The second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a predetermined large winning opening solenoid, and forms a large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the large winning opening door solenoid is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the large winning opening door solenoid is in the ON state, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening. A game ball that has entered a special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. A plurality of types of normal symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. The normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9” or the symbols indicating “−” as normal symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately illuminating decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, one or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. For example, an operation button 30 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate. The operation button 30 is a jog dial that can be pressed and rotated. The operation button 30 is not limited to a button that can be pressed or rotated, and may be a button that can be touched or pressed, such as a touch panel, or tilted like a lever-type switch. Operation may be possible. Further, instead of the operation button 30, a sensor that can detect a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. That is, the operation button 30 only needs to be able to detect a predetermined operation action by the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

  In the normal game with the normal symbol display 20, the normal symbol display 20 shows that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the general chart start condition for executing variable display is established, based on the fact that the general chart start condition for starting variable display of normal symbols, such as the end of the previous general chart game, is established, Be started. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  The special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is caused by the fact that the game ball that has entered the first starting winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is satisfied, the process is started on the basis that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit game state. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B, a game ball that has entered the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied by the above, it is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the last special figure game or the big hit gaming state.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the special symbol variable display is started, after the predetermined time has elapsed, a fixed special symbol that becomes a variable symbol variable display result is displayed. Stop display (derived display). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, “big hit” is obtained as a specific display result, and if a special symbol other than the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “lost” is displayed. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round game advantageous to the player (also simply referred to as “round”) is executed a predetermined number of times. . In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an example, numbers indicating “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, and a symbol indicating “−” is a lost symbol. Each symbol such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A may be a different special symbol from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. However, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol or a lost symbol.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” are 15 rounds. The jackpot symbol is a special symbol indicating the numbers “1” and “5”. In the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) as a multi-round specific gaming state controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the open / close plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played by opening the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. A round is performed which changes to the first state which is advantageous to the person. In this way, the open / close plate that opened the grand prize opening during the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closed the grand prize opening to play the special variable prize ball device 7 as a game. Change to the second state, which is disadvantageous to the person, and finish one round. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round, which is the opening cycle of the big prize opening, becomes the first round number (for example, “15”). A game in the 15 round big hit state in which the number of round executions is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game. In such a 15 round big hit state, 15 balls are obtained each time a game ball wins a big winning opening. The 15 round round big hit state is also referred to as a first specific gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) as a small round specific gaming state controlled after the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played in each round. The period for changing to the first state that is advantageous to the player (the period in which the big prize opening is opened by the opening / closing plate) is a second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit state. . In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round becomes a second round number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first round number in the 15 round big hit state. Note that in the 2 round big hit state, it is only necessary to control the number of executions of the round to be the second round number, and other control may be performed in the same manner as the 15 round big hit state. A game in the round two big hit state in which the number of round executions is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In the two-round big hit state, the predetermined winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round is changed from the second state which is disadvantageous to the player to the first state which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to return to the second state after a predetermined period (first period or second period) has elapsed. In such a two-round big win state, if a game ball wins a big winning opening, 15 balls will be obtained, but the opening period of the big winning opening is the second period (0.5 seconds) Short. Therefore, the two-round big hit state is a big hit gaming state in which a game is not substantially obtained. The 2 round big hit state is also referred to as a second specific gaming state. In addition, the big hit gaming state as the low round specific gaming state is not limited to the number of round execution times compared to the big hit gaming state as the multiple round specific gaming state. For example, the round execution number is small round specific gaming state. While the state and the multi-round specific gaming state are the same, in the small-round specific gaming state, the upper limit period (for example, 2 seconds) for opening the big prize opening is the upper limit period for the multi-round specific gaming state (for example, 29 seconds) ) May be shorter.

  In addition, among the special symbols indicating the numbers of “3” and “7” that will be the 15-round big hit symbol, the special symbol indicating the number of “3” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special game. After the 15th round jackpot state, which is a non-special game state for rounds, is completed, a special symbol indicating the number “1” is displayed among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1” and “5” that are the 2nd round jackpot symbol. After the 2 round big hit state that becomes the non-special game state of the small round (also referred to as the fourth specific game state) based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special figure is compared with the normal state. It is controlled to a state where the special symbol variation time (special symbol variation time) in the game is shortened. Here, the normal state is a normal game state as a game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, a probability change state, and a short time state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a system reset is performed). As in the case where the initialization process is performed after the power is turned on, the same control is performed. If the time-saving state ends when either of the predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) the special figure game is executed and the variable display result is “big hit” is satisfied first, Good. Like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, the 15 round jackpot symbol controlled to the short-time state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is second. It is referred to as a jackpot symbol (also referred to as “15-round non-probable big hit symbol”). Like the special symbol indicating the number “1”, the two round big hit symbol that is controlled to the short-time state after the big hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is the fourth big hit It is called a symbol (also referred to as “two-round non-probable big hit symbol”). The fact that the second big hit symbol is stopped and displayed and the variable display result is “big hit” is called “second big hit” (also referred to as “15R uncertain change”). The fact that the fourth big hit symbol is stopped and displayed and the variable display result is “big hit” is called “fourth big hit” (also referred to as “2R non-probability change”).

  Among the special symbols that show the numbers of “3” and “7” that will be the 15-round jackpot symbol, the special symbol that shows the number of “7” is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. After the 15th round big hit state that becomes the specific gaming state is finished, among the special symbols showing the numbers “1” and “5” that become the 2 round big hit designs, the special design showing the number “5” is a special game. After the 2nd round big hit state that becomes a small round non-special game state (also referred to as the third specific game state) based on being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the game, as one of the special game states, for example, As compared to the state, the special figure variation time is shortened, and the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control (probability variation control) is continuously performed is controlled. In this probabilistic state, the variable display result of each special figure game and decorative design is improved so that the probability that the variable display result will be “big hit” and further controlled to the big hit gaming state will be higher than in the normal state and the short-time state. To do. Such a probability change state continues until the next variable display result is a “big hit”, regardless of the number of executions of the special game. While the high probability state such as the probability variation state is included in the special game state, the normal state is included in the normal probability state, which is different from the high probability state such as the probability variation state, as well as the short time state. Like the special symbol indicating the number “7”, the 15-round jackpot symbol controlled to the probable state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is first. It is referred to as a big hit symbol (also referred to as “15 round probability variable big hit symbol”). Like the special symbol indicating the number “5”, the two round big hit symbol that is controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is the third big hit It is referred to as a symbol (also referred to as “two-round probability variation big hit symbol”). Further, the fact that the first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed and the variable display result becomes “big hit” is called “first big hit” (also referred to as “15R probability change”). The fact that the third big hit symbol is stopped and the variable display result is “big hit” is called “third big hit” (also referred to as “2R probability change”). The 15 round jackpot symbols “3” and “7” and the 2 round jackpot symbols “1” and “5” are examples, and each jackpot symbol is not limited to these. For example, in order to prevent the player from recognizing the jackpot symbol or the type of jackpot, the jackpot symbol may not be a number but may be a predetermined symbol (for example, “co”).

  In the probabilistic state or the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The second start condition is such that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of establishment. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. That is, the control other than the probability variation control (probability variation control) is the same in the probability variation state and the short time state in the probability variation state. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a certain variation state or a short-time state from the control mode of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of effect modes with different effect modes in the image display device 5 and the like. In other words, “battle mode”, “chance mode”, “super hot mode”, and “normal mode” are provided. The “normal mode” is an effect mode in which the decorative symbols are changed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. The “battle mode” is an effect mode in which a plurality of characters fight (perform a battle) effect (battle effect) on the image display device 5. For example, a battle effect is executed in which the variable display result is “big hit” and a predetermined ally character fights against any of a plurality of prepared enemy characters. In the “chance mode” and the “super hot mode”, the image display device 5 performs an effect by the teammate character, and an effect suggesting a shift to the “battle mode” is performed. These modes are switched according to the current performance mode and jackpot type when the jackpot gaming state ends.

  FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the effect mode. As shown in FIG. 3, when the first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in all the production modes, the game shifts to a big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state), and then enters the “battle mode”. In other words, the “battle mode” is in a certain change state. In all effect modes, when the second jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it shifts to a jackpot gaming state (15 rounds jackpot state) and then shifts to a “chance mode”. In the “normal mode”, when the third big hit symbol or the fourth big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the game proceeds to the “chance mode” through the two round big hit state. As described above, during the “chance mode”, the time is short (after the second big hit or after the fourth big hit) or the probability variation state (after the third big hit). In the “chance mode” after the two round big hit state, the player cannot recognize whether it is the short-time state or the probable change state. On the other hand, in the “chance mode” after 15 rounds of big hit, the player can recognize that the player is in a short time state.

  In the “chance mode”, when the third big hit symbol or the fourth big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the “chance mode” is continued. If it is in the short time state, the number of executions of the special figure game in the “chance mode” is the first short time upper limit number (when the fourth big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal state) or the second short time upper limit number (probability change). When the fourth big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the state or in the time-saving state), the time-shorting state is ended and the mode is changed to the “normal mode”. On the other hand, if it is in a probabilistic state, the process proceeds to the “super hot mode”. By shifting from the “chance mode” to the “super hot mode”, the player can recognize that the player is in a promiscuous state.

  When the fourth big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the “super hot mode”, the mode shifts to the “chance mode”. When the third big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the “super hot mode”, the “super hot mode” is continued.

  When the fourth big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the “battle mode”, the mode shifts to the “chance mode”. In the “battle mode”, when the third big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the “chance mode” is transferred at a rate of 80%, and the “battle mode” is continued at a rate of 20%. That is, when the third big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the “battle mode”, a part is shifted to the “chance mode”, and when not shifted to the “chance mode”, the “battle mode” is continued. As described above, even when the mode is changed from the “battle mode” to the “chance mode”, the player may be in a probable state, so that the player's expectation can be improved.

  Each production mode is managed by a mode flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 shown in FIG. That is, the mode flag value is “0” in the normal mode, the mode flag value is “1” in the battle mode, the mode flag value is “2” in the chance mode, In this case, the value of the mode flag is “3”.

  In the display area of the image display device 5 in the “normal mode”, variable display of decorative symbols is performed in synchronization with variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. That is, in the display area of the image display device 5, each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5 </ b> L is based on the establishment of either the first start condition or the second start condition. At 5C and 5R, variation of the decorative symbols is started, and, for example, the fixed decorative symbols that are variable display results of the decorative symbols in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle” are stopped and displayed (derived display). Note that the procedure for stopping and displaying the confirmed decorative symbols is not limited to the procedure for stopping and displaying the decorative symbols in the predetermined order in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, there may be included one that stops and displays a decorative symbol that becomes a confirmed decorative symbol simultaneously.

  In the period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, The decorative display variable display state may become a predetermined reach mode (also referred to as “reach pattern”). Here, the reach mode refers to a decorative pattern that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination ("reach variation pattern"). Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the decorative pattern is changing, or the decorative symbol is a big hit in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. This is a display state that changes synchronously while constituting all or part of the combination. Corresponding to the reach mode, a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or the display mode of the background image is changed. Or change the variation of the decorative pattern. Such a change in the display mode of the character image, the display mode of the background image, and the change in the variation mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). A reach that does not involve reach production is called normal reach, and a reach that involves reach production is called super reach. In this embodiment, there are four types of reach: reach A (normal reach), reach B (super reach 1), reach C (super reach 2), and reach D (super reach 3) (shown in FIG. 51). See Reach AD). Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability”). Further, in this embodiment, the reliability of each reach mode changes according to the total number of reserved memories. For example, in reach D of FIG. 51, after the character image is displayed as shown in FIG. 51 (F2), when the variable display result is derived and displayed, is the derived display result “big hit”? Depending on whether it is “losing”, the facial expression of the character (at the time of the big hit: rejoicing, at the time of the loss: sadness) may change at the time of the derivation display. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Those that perform the same reach production are treated as the same reach mode. In the reach effect display, the variation of the decorative symbol is executed in the decorative symbol display area 5M provided in the display area of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 57A). For example, in the decorative symbol display area 5M provided at the corner of the display area, a variation in decorative symbols having a size smaller than that in the normal reach may be executed.

  When a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode, and the predetermined symbol is displayed. There are cases in which a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as “non-reach” (also referred to as “unreach loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  Corresponding to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being changed to the reach mode after the variable symbol display is started when the special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game Then, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a confirmed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  In addition, during the variable display of decorative symbols, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of decorative symbols may become the reach state, and the variable display result may be a “hit” In some cases, an effect for informing the player is given in accordance with a variable display mode of decorative symbols. Of these effects, an effect operation that is executed based on the determination result on the main board 11 side that is the control board on the main side is referred to as a “main designated effect”. In this embodiment, the production operations such as “slip”, “pseudo train”, “intro”, “expansion chance” and “end of development opportunity” become “main designated production” and vary on the main board 11 side. Corresponding to the determination of the pattern or the like, it is determined whether or not to execute each rendering operation.

  In the main designated effect of “slip”, two or more decorative symbol display areas are displayed after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After temporarily displaying a decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R (for example, “left” and “right”), a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) decorative symbol display area (for example, either “left” decorative symbol display area 5L or “right” decorative symbol display area 5R or both), the decorative symbol is changed again and then stopped. Thus, the effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed to the player by, for example, performing a fluctuation change display or immediately changing the decorative symbol again only by stopping for a short time. It is only necessary to notify that the decorative pattern is not fixed. Alternatively, in the temporary stop display, the decorative design may be re-fluctuated after the decorative design is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the decorative design that has been stopped is confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-ream” main designation effect, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols are based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once. After the decorative symbols are changed in all of the display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, The effect display for changing the decorative design again (pseudo continuous change) at 5C and 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times). As an example, in the main designated effect of “pseudo-ream”, a decorative pattern that constitutes a predetermined pseudo-ream chance pattern in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is displayed as a temporary stop. Here, the “left symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed (stopped display or temporary stop display) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the “middle symbol” is displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. The “right symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. Note that the quasi-continuous chances may be determined in advance as a combination of decorative symbols included in the special combination.

  In the main designated effect of “Intro”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then all the decorative symbol display areas 5L. Before the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (final stop display) at 5C and 5R, a predetermined effect display such as an introduction part of the effect display performed in the reach effect is performed, for example.

  In the main designated effect of “Development Opportunity”, all the decorative symbols are displayed after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, after temporarily displaying the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination, a predetermined reach effect is started with the variable display state of the decorative symbols as the reach state. Is done. As an example, in the main designated effect of “Development Chance Eye”, decorative symbols constituting predetermined development chance eyes in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is displayed as a temporary stop. Therefore, the player's expectation that the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state by the temporary stop display of the development chance, and that the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. A feeling is heightened.

  In the main designated effect of “end of development opportunity”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then all decorative symbols are changed. In the display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, an effect display is performed in which a combination of decorative symbols predetermined as development opportunities is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). As an example, in the main designation effect of “end of development opportunity”, the development chance items temporarily displayed in the main designation effect of “development opportunity” are stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  In the display area of the image display device 5 in the “battle mode”, the variation of the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as in the normal mode described above, The reach effect and the main designated effect that are executed in the normal mode (low probability state) are not executed. In the “battle mode”, the variation of the decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display area 5M provided in the display area of the image display device 5. For example, in the decorative symbol display area 5M provided at the corner of the display area, the variation of the decorative symbol having a size smaller than that in the “normal mode” may be executed. In the “battle mode”, a teammate character and a plurality of enemy characters are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a battle effect is performed in which the teammate character and the enemy character fight when a “hit” occurs. In this embodiment, when the variable display result of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is “big hit”, a battle effect is executed in which the enemy character and the teammate character corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A fight. Is done. Further, when the variable symbol display result of the special symbol display device 4B is “big hit”, a battle effect is executed in which the enemy character and the teammate character corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B fight. The player can recognize in which special symbol display device the variable display result is “big hit” due to the difference in the battle effect. For example, when the first jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed during the “battle mode”, the teammate character performs an effect of winning the enemy character and then shifts to the jackpot gaming state. When the big hit gaming state ends, the “battle mode” continues. When any of the second big hit symbol, the third big hit symbol, or the fourth big hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the “battle mode”, a battle effect in which the teammate character loses to the enemy character is executed. When the fourth big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to “chance mode”. When the third big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the mode shifts to “chance mode” at a rate of 80%, and “battle mode” continues at a rate of 20%. If the lost symbol is stopped and displayed during the “battle mode”, the battle effect is not executed and the “battle mode” is continued. In this embodiment, the number of times of winning the battle during the “battle mode” (the number of times the first big hit symbol or the second big hit symbol is stopped and displayed) is counted. Then, the number of wins is displayed in the battle win count display area 5W provided in the display area of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 57A). The number of wins is counted continuously when the mode is once shifted to the “chance mode” and then shifted to the “battle mode” again before becoming the “normal mode”. In addition, when the variable display result of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is “lost” during the “battle mode”, the variable display result of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is “lost”. It may be so arranged that the effects are executed in different effect modes.

  In addition, during the variable display of the special symbol in the “battle mode”, unlike the reach effect that is executed in the normal mode (low probability state), for example, displaying a predetermined character image or message image, etc. Depending on the display mode other than the variable display mode of the decorative symbols, a notice effect may be executed to notify the player that the variable display result may be a “big hit”. In this embodiment, a “pre-battle notice effect” that is a notice effect before the start of the battle effect in the “battle mode” and a “post-battle notice effect” that is a notice effect after the battle effect is started are executed. Is possible.

  In the “pre-battle announcement effect”, before the battle effect is executed in the display area of the image display device 5, an effect display such as a motion of fighting characters or simultaneously displaying a shooting star image is performed. The “pre-battle announcement effect” may also be executed when the variable display result is “lost”. In the “battle mode”, when a “hit” is achieved, an effect of battle between characters (battle effect) is executed, but it is possible to execute a pre-battle notice effect that makes it seem that such a battle effect is executed. As a result, the effects in the “battle mode” become more diverse. “Pre-battle notice effect” has three kinds of notice patterns of notice A, notice B, and notice C with different effects, and each of the notice patterns may be a “hit” (also called “reliability”). ) Are different, and the ratio of which jackpot type is different.

  In the “post-battle notice effect”, after starting the battle effect in the display area of the image display device 5, an image of cherry blossoms is displayed, and then a part of the body of an ally character or enemy character is displayed. An effect display such as suggesting which character has won is performed. For the “post-battle notice effect”, four types of notice patterns of notice D1, notice D2, notice E1, and notice E2 having different effects are prepared, and the ratio of which jackpot type is different in each notice pattern. . In the notice D1 and notice D2 prepared here, the same notice effect is executed halfway. Further, the same notice effect is executed halfway between the notice E1 and the notice E2. For example, the notice D1 and the notice D2 are the same up to the image where the cherry blossom snowflies, and then the character on which a part of the body is displayed is made different. By doing so, it is impossible to determine whether the notice D1 or the notice D2 or the notice E1 or the notice E2 is reached until the end of the notice effect, so that the player's expectation can be enhanced. Note that a plurality of notice patterns that are delayed or advanced with respect to the reference occurrence time by providing a reference occurrence time of the notice announcement effect ("pre-battle notice effect", "post-battle notice effect"). May be prepared. By preparing such a notice pattern, the occurrence timing of the notice effect becomes irregular, and an unexpected effect is possible. Further, the notice effect is different when the special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed and when the special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B is executed. An effect may be executed according to the effect mode.

  In the display area of the image display device 5 in the “chance mode”, the variation of the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as in the normal mode, The reach effect that is executed in the (low probability state) is not executed. Even in the “chance mode”, the variation of the decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display area 5M provided in the display area of the image display device 5. Further, in the “chance mode”, an effect such as displaying an ally character in the display area of the image display device 5 and searching for an enemy character is executed. For example, when the first big hit symbol or the second big hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the “chance mode”, the teammate character performs an effect of finding an enemy character, and then shifts to the big hit gaming state. When the big hit gaming state is finished, the mode shifts to “battle mode”. When the third big hit symbol or the fourth big hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the “chance mode”, an effect that the teammate character fails to find the enemy character is executed, and the “chance mode” is continued.

  In the “super hot mode”, the same effects as the “chance mode” are executed, and the background is different from the “chance mode” so that it can be distinguished from the “chance mode”.

  In the “battle mode”, “chance mode”, and “super hot mode”, the decoration symbol change is executed in the decoration symbol display area 5M. However, the decoration symbol change may not be executed.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” that is a special symbol that becomes a 15-round jackpot symbol is stopped, and when the special symbol “3” that becomes a 7-round jackpot symbol is displayed. When a special symbol indicating a number is stopped and displayed, in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol becoming a reach aspect, after the reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, The confirmed decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. As an example, when the confirmed special symbol is a special symbol indicating the number “3” that is the second jackpot symbol, a confirmed decorative symbol that is a predetermined normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed. As another example, when the confirmed special symbol is a special symbol indicating the number “7” which is the first big hit symbol, a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined probability variable big hit combination may be derived and displayed. There is a case where a fixed decorative symbol that is usually a big hit combination is derived and displayed. When the confirmed special symbol is a promising big hit symbol, after the fixed ornament symbol that is normally a big hit combination is derived and displayed, the big hit gaming state is started, the round in the big hit gaming state is being executed, or the big hit gaming state At the time of termination or the like, an effect operation for notifying that the state is controlled to the certain change state may be performed.

  For example, the symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are the determined decorative symbols that are jackpot combinations. Any one of the “8” decorative symbols is displayed in a stop on the predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. I just need it. In addition, as for the fixed decorative pattern which is a normal jackpot combination, any one of the decorative patterns whose pattern numbers are even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” are “left”, “middle”, “ All of the “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”). The confirmed decorative pattern that is a probable big hit combination is one of the decorative patterns with the odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “left”, “middle”, “right”. Any of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols.

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a 15-round jackpot symbol indicating the number “7”, after the reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the confirmed ornament of the jackpot combination The decorative display variable display mode in which the symbols are stopped and displayed is referred to as a variable display mode (big hit type) of “first big hit” (also referred to as “15R probability change”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. . Thus, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the variable display mode of “first big hit”, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the probability change state. . Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a 15-round big hit symbol indicating the number “3”, after the reach effect is executed or the reach effect is not executed, The decorative display variable display mode in which the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is a variable display mode (big hit type) of “second big hit” (also referred to as “15R uncertain change”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Called. Thus, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the variable display mode of “second big hit”, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the short time state. .

  When any one of the special symbols indicating the numbers “1” and “5” that are the two-round jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is the reach mode. Corresponding to this, after the reach effect is executed or without the reach effect being executed, the fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined two-round jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, for example, the symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the image display device 5 are the determined decorative symbols that are the two round big hit combinations. Any one of the “8” decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the predetermined active line in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and stopped at “left” and “right”. The decorative symbol of the symbol number obtained by adding 1 to the symbol number of the displayed decorative symbol (for example, “2” when “left”, “right” is “1”, “1” when “8”) , As long as it can be stopped and displayed on the same active line in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C (for example, “1”, “2”, “1”, etc.). Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a two-round big hit symbol indicating the number “5”, after the reach effect is executed or the reach effect is not executed, The decorative display variable display mode in which the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is referred to as a variable display mode (big hit type) of “third big hit” (also referred to as “2R probability change”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Is done. Thus, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the variable display mode of “third big hit”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the probability variation state. . Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a two-round big hit symbol indicating the number “1”, after the reach effect is executed or the reach effect is not executed, The decorative display variable display mode in which the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed is a variable display mode (big hit type) of “fourth big hit” (also referred to as “2R uncertain change”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Called. Thus, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the variable display mode of “fourth big hit”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the short time state. .

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 is mounted with, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and a switch circuit 110 that takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first and second starter switches 22 </ b> A and 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first and second starter switches 22A and 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. If it is. Further, the main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, and the like. The main board 11 only needs to be connected to a wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing opening / closing drive control, such as a solenoid for an ordinary electric accessory and a solenoid for a prize winning door.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 15 side to the main board 11 side.

  The relay board 15 only needs to be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent the signal from being input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing this, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 4A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 4A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  In this embodiment, the first and second change start commands and the change pattern designation command are prepared as separate effect control commands. On the other hand, the designation content indicating which of the first special figure and the second special figure is to be changed and the designated content of the fluctuation pattern are configured to be specified by one effect control command. Also good. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a special symbol (first special figure or second special figure) that starts change and a change pattern is prepared. You may enable it to specify the special symbol and fluctuation pattern which become a fluctuation start. Here, when the special symbol and the variation pattern that start the variation can be specified by one effect control command, the special symbol (the first special feature that starts the variation) for one variation pattern. There are cases where it is necessary to prepare two types of effect control commands according to the figure or the second special figure). On the other hand, if an effect control command for designating a special symbol for starting variation and an effect control command for designating a variation pattern are prepared separately, two types of effect control commands corresponding to the special symbol for starting variation are prepared. And the number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types of variation patterns may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 4B, the result of prior determination as to whether the variable display result is “losing” or “big hit”, and the variable display result is “big hit”. EXT data different in accordance with the big hit type determination result of whether the decorative display variable display mode is “first big hit”, “second big hit”, “third big hit”, or “fourth big hit” Is set. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a prior determination result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command indicating a prior determination result and a jackpot type determination result indicating that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “first jackpot” when the variable display result is “big jackpot”. . The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command indicating a prior determination result and a jackpot type determination result that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “second jackpot” when the variable display result is “big jackpot”. . Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command indicating a prior determination result and a jackpot type determination result that the decorative symbol variable display mode is "third jackpot" when the variable display result is "big jackpot". . The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result notification command indicating a prior determination result that the variable display result is “fourth big hit” and a big hit type determination result.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result indicated in the variable display result notification command may be configured to be specified by one effect control command. As an example, an effect control command for setting EXT data corresponding to a combination of a variation pattern and a variable display result (one of “losing” and “big hit” and a big hit type in the case of “big hit”) is prepared. Then, information that can specify the variation pattern and the variable display result may be transmitted by the effect control command. Alternatively, the variation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands. Here, when the variation pattern and the variable display result are configured to be specified by a single effect control command, a plurality of types of effects corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display results for one variation pattern. You may need to provide control commands. On the other hand, if the production control command for designating the variation pattern and the production control command for notifying the variable display result are prepared separately, the number of production control commands corresponding to the number of types of the variation pattern and the variable display result are provided. The number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8F00H is a decorative symbol stop command for designating stop of variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5.

  The command A0XXH is a jackpot start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state. In the jackpot start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the prior determination result or the jackpot type determination result. Alternatively, in the jackpot start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the prior determination result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command.

  The command A1XXH is a command for opening a big prize opening for 15 rounds, which designates display of an effect image during a period in which the big prize opening is open in each round, corresponding to the 15 rounds big hit state. Command A2XXH designates display of an effect image (for example, an effect image in an interval between rounds) during a period in which the big prize opening is changed from an open state to a closed state at the end of each round, corresponding to the 15 round big hit state. This is a designation command for the round jackpot after opening the big prize opening. In the special command for opening the big prize opening for 15 rounds and the designation command after opening the big prize opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the 15 round big hit state. Is set. In the 15 round big hit state, regardless of whether it is a period in which the grand prize opening is open in each round or a period in which the big prize opening is changed from the open state to the closed state by the end of each round. , 15 round round big hit state from the start time to the end time may be executed continuously.

  Command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state. In the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to the variable display result notification command or the big hit start designation command is set, and thus different EXT data is set according to the prior determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the preliminary determination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command or the big hit start designation command. .

  Command A6XXH is a two-round jackpot opening big prize opening designation command that designates display of effect images during a period in which the big prize opening is open in each round, corresponding to the two round big hit state. Command A7XXH designates display of an effect image (for example, an effect image in an interval between rounds) during a period in which the big prize opening is changed from an open state to a closed state at the end of each round, corresponding to the two round big hit state 2 This is a designation command for the round jackpot after opening the big prize opening. In the special command for opening a big prize opening for two rounds and a designation command after opening the big prize opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” or “2”) in the two round big hit state Is set. In the 2 round big hit state, regardless of whether it is a period in which the grand prize opening is open in each round or the period in which the big prize opening is changed from the open state to the closed state at the end of each round. You may make it perform a continuous production | presentation operation | movement from the start time of the 2 round big hit state to the end time. Alternatively, the command A1XXH, the command A2XXH, the command A6XXH, and the command A7XXH may be a common command, and different EXT data may be set depending on the number of round executions. In this way, a common command can be used regardless of the type of jackpot (number of rounds), and the number of commands can be reduced.

  The command B001H is for executing a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. This is a first start port winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition is satisfied. The command B002H is for executing a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting prize opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition is established.

  The command C0XXH displays the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number so as to be specified in the start winning memory display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5. This is a pending storage count notification command for notifying the total pending storage count that is the total value of. In response to the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, for example, either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted as the reserved storage number notification command. Following this, it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the reserved memory count notification command, for example, the total number of stored data (for example, “1” to “8”) of the reserved data in the first special figure reserved storage section 151A and the second special figure reserved storage section 151B shown in FIG. Alternatively, different EXT data is set corresponding to the total number of start data stored in the start data storage unit 151C (for example, “1” to “8”). Thereby, on the side of the production control board 12, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, and the first special drawing is received. The total number of stored hold data in the hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B can be specified.

  In this embodiment, the first and second start opening winning designation commands and the reserved memory number designation command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, the notification content indicating which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied and the notification content of the total reserved storage number are configured to be specified by one effect control command. Also good. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to the combination of the established start condition (the first start condition or the second start condition) and the total reserved memory number is prepared. The established start condition and the total number of reserved memories may be specified. Here, when it is possible to specify which one of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied by one effect control command together with the total reserved memory number, for example, the upper limit value of the total reserved memory number is “8”. ”, It is necessary to prepare a total of 16 types of effect control commands of 8 types corresponding to the case where the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied. On the other hand, if an effect control command that can specify which of the first start condition and the second start condition is established and an effect control command that can specify the total number of reserved memories are prepared separately, the first It is only necessary to prepare a total of 10 types of effect control commands, that is, two types of effect control commands that can specify each of the start condition and the second start condition, and eight types of effect control commands that can specify the total number of reserved memories. The types of commands prepared in advance and the storage capacity of the command table can be reduced.

  Command D0XXH is an effect mode transition notification command for notifying that the effect mode transitions. The effect mode transition notification command is, for example, when the main board 11 is switched from the “normal mode” to the “battle mode” or from the “battle mode” to the “chance mode” after the big hit gaming state is finished. To the effect control board 12. In addition, every time the variation in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is executed, it may be transmitted together with the variation pattern designation command. In this way, even when the production mode transition notification command cannot be transmitted normally, the production mode can be restored normally by the next change. Command D1XXH is an effect mode transition notification command for notifying the number of battle wins. The effect mode transition notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 every time the number of battle wins is updated. Thereby, the battle victory frequency can be specified on the side of the production control board 12, the battle victory frequency can be displayed in the battle victory frequency display area 5W, and the enemy character or background can be displayed corresponding to the battle victory frequency. Can be different.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A random access memory (RAM) 102 that provides an area, a central processing unit (CPU) 103 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, a random number circuit 104 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103, and I / O (Input / Output port) 105. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  On the main board 11, for example, the random number circuit 104 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, a random value MR3 for determining the reach, a fluctuation pattern Numeric data indicating the random number value MR4 for type determination, the random value MR5 for variation pattern determination, and the random value MR6 for general map display result determination are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1 to MR6. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR6 may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated independently from the CPU 103 by the random number circuit 104, and the numerical data indicating the other random number values MR2 to MR6 is updated by the CPU 103 using the random counter. It may be updated by software using The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as the big hit game state as “big hit”. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “65535” is taken.

  The random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is used as a plurality of specific variable display types such as “first big hit” to “fourth big hit” when the variable display result is “big hit”. This is a random value used to determine one of the big hit types, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”, for example. The reach determination random number value MR3 is a random value used for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach mode when the variable display result is “lost”. For example, “1” ”To“ 100 ”.

  The random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is a random value used to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random number value MR4 is in a range of “1” to “100”. Takes the value of The random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “100” Take.

  The random value MR6 for determining the normal figure display result is used for determining whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per common figure" or "missing the normal figure". For example, a value in the range of “1” to “150”. That is, the random value MR6 for determining the normal game display result is a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the normal start-up winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result in the normal game (normally open state). ) Is used to determine whether or not it is changed to a state in which a game ball can easily enter (expanded open state).

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation pattern of a decorative design prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns such as non-reach (lack), reach (lack), reach (big hit), special, battle win, battle defeat, chance, etc. are prepared as variation patterns. ing. Note that the types of variation patterns are not limited to these, and more variation patterns may be prepared.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of determination data prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations and data constituting the determination data. Further, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a variation pattern for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns of decorative symbols. Table data constituting the table is stored.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of special figure display result determination data stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, as the special figure display result judgment data, for example, the first special figure display result judgment data 130A shown in FIG. 7A and the second special figure display result judgment shown in FIG. 7B. Data 130B is prepared in advance. The first special figure display result determination data 130A is variably displayed before a definite special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Whether or not the result is determined to be a big hit gaming state is determined based on the determination result whether or not the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result matches the big hit determination value data. This is data for determination to be referred to. The first special figure display result determination data 130A is a random value for determining the special figure display result depending on whether the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 shown in FIG. 19 is off or on. MR1 is composed of jackpot determination value data, setting data (determination data) that is associated (assigned) to loss determination value data, and the like. The second special figure display result determination data 130B is variably displayed before the definite special symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Whether or not the result is determined to be a big hit gaming state is determined based on the determination result whether or not the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result matches the big hit determination value data. This is data for determination to be referred to. In the second special figure display result determination data 130B, the random value MR1 for special figure display result determination is assigned to the big hit determination value data or the loss determination value data depending on whether the probability variation flag is OFF or ON. It consists of decision data. In this embodiment, the game is a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special graphic game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B. Accordingly, special figure display result determination data to which different determination value data is assigned is prepared. On the other hand, the common special symbol display result determination data may be used in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. By doing so, the data amount of the special figure display result determination data can be reduced.

  FIG. 8 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination data 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination data 131 is a decoration pattern based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” and it is determined to control the jackpot game state. Is a determination data referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of big hit types such as “first big hit”, “second big hit”, “third big hit”, and “fourth big hit”. . Whether the big hit type determination data 131 is “1” or “2” in the value of the variation special figure designation buffer (variation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. Accordingly, the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is composed of determination data assigned to the big hit types of “first big hit”, “second big hit”, “third big hit”, “fourth big hit”, and the like. Yes. Further, the jackpot type determination data 131 is determined based on the jackpot type buffer value (hit type buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 19 based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type. Further, setting data for setting to any one of “00” to “03” corresponding to the jackpot type may be included.

  Here, in the setting of the big hit type determining data 131 shown in FIG. 8, depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”, the big hit type determining randomness for each big hit type is determined. The assignment of the numerical value MR2 is different. For example, regardless of whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”, the value in the range of “1” to “66” of the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is “first big hit Is assigned to the jackpot type. Since the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”, the decision ratio determined as “first big hit” has the variable special figure designation buffer value “1”. And “2”, whether it is 66% (66/100). When the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the random special value MR2 for determining the big hit type is not assigned to the big hit type of “second big hit”, while the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “ In the case of 2 ″, a value in the range of “67” to “98” among the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit type of “second big hit”. Therefore, the determination ratio determined as “second big hit” is 0% (0/100) when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”. In some cases, it is 32% (32/100).

  With such a setting, the variable display result is set to “big hit” based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is established. When it is decided to control to the state, the multi-round decision ratio that will be controlled to the 15 round big hit state by determining the big hit type as either “first big hit” or “second big hit” is the first special symbol display Multi-round determination when it is determined that the variable display result is set to “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the device 4A More than a percentage. That is, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the multi-round determination ratio is 66% (66/100 + 0/100), while the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”. The multi-round determination ratio is 98% (66/100 + 32/100 = 98/100). Further, when the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is established, the variable display result is controlled as the big hit game state as “big hit”. When it is decided, the multi-round non-special decision ratio that becomes the short-time state after the big hit type is determined as “second big hit” and controlled to the 15 round big hit gaming state is the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. More than the multi-round non-special decision rate when it is determined that the variable display result is controlled as the big hit game state based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the game is established. . That is, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the multi-round non-special determination ratio is 0% (0/100), while the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”. The multi-round non-special decision rate is 32% (32/100).

  In addition, in the setting of the big hit type determination data 131 shown in FIG. 8, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, “67” and “68” of the random number MR2 for big hit type determination When the value is assigned to the big hit type “third big hit” and the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the values “99” and “100” of the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type Is assigned to the jackpot type of “third jackpot”. And since the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”, the ratio determined as the “third big hit” is that the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”. Regardless of whether it is “2”, it is 2% (2/100). Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the value in the range of “69” to “100” among the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit type of “fourth big hit”. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is not assigned to the big hit type “fourth big hit”. Therefore, the ratio determined as “fourth big hit” is 32% (32/100) when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”. In this case, 0% (0/100) is obtained.

  With this setting, when it is determined that the big hit gaming state is controlled based on the establishment of the second start condition, after the big hit type is determined to be “fourth big hit” and controlled to the two round big hit gaming state, The small round non-special decision rate becomes smaller than the small round non-special decision proportion when the first start condition is satisfied, or becomes zero. That is, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the small round non-special determination ratio is 32% (32/100), while the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”. The non-special decision ratio for the small round is 0% (0/100). In addition, when it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state based on the establishment of the second start condition, after determining the big hit type as either “first big hit” or “third big hit” and controlling to the big hit gaming state, The special transition ratio that becomes the probability variation state is the same as the special transition ratio when the first start condition is satisfied. That is, regardless of whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”, the special transition ratio is 68% (66/100 + 2/100 = 68/100). In other words, when it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state based on the establishment of the second start condition, after determining the jackpot type as either “second jackpot” or “fourth jackpot” and controlling to the jackpot gaming state The normal probability transition rate in which the time is short is the same as the normal probability transition rate when the first start condition is satisfied. That is, regardless of whether the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”, the normal probability transition rate is 32% (32/100 + 0/100 = 32/100).

  Thus, depending on which of the first winning prize opening and the second starting prize opening the change of the special symbol based on the starting prize is started, the part where the game value of the big hit gaming state changes and the part which does not change It can be provided, and the game can be sharpened within a range that does not give a disadvantage to the player. In the case where the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The ratio of “second big hit” (multi-round non-special determination ratio) may be larger than 0% (0/100), but the multi-round non-special determination ratio when the second start condition is satisfied. It is desirable to reduce the number. Further, when determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is established, The ratio of “fourth big hit” (small round non-special decision ratio) may be larger than 0% (0/100), but less than the small round non-special decision ratio when the first start condition is satisfied. It is desirable to reduce the number.

  FIG. 9 shows a configuration example of reach determination data stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, reach determination data 132A and 132B shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B are prepared in advance as the reach determination data. The reach determination data 132A indicates that the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set as the reach mode when it is determined that the variable display result is “lost” in the “normal mode”, “chance mode”, and “super hot mode”. Whether or not to be determined is determined based on the reach determination random number MR3. The reach determination data 132A is one of a determination result of “no reach” indicating that the reach determination random number MR3 is not set as a reach mode and a determination result of “reach” indicating that the reach mode is set as a reach mode. It consists of data for determination to be assigned to.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach determination data 132A, a value in the range of “1” to “10” among the random numbers MR3 for reach determination corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “1” or less. Is assigned to the determination result indicating that the reach mode is set, and the value in the range of “11” to “100” is allocated to the determination result indicating that the reach mode is not set. Further, in response to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “2” to “3”, it is determined that the values in the range of “1” to “7” among the random value MR3 for reach determination are set to the reach mode. On the other hand, a value in the range of “8” to “100” is assigned to the determination result indicating that the reach mode is not set. Corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “4” to “5”, the determination result indicating that the value in the range of “1” to “5” among the random value MR3 for reach determination is set to the reach mode. On the other hand, a value in the range of “6” to “100” is assigned to a determination result indicating that the reach mode is not set. Corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “6” or more, a value in the range of “1” to “2” among the random numbers MR3 for reach determination is assigned to the determination result indicating that the reach mode is set. On the other hand, a value in the range of “3” to “100” is assigned to a determination result indicating that the reach mode is not set. With such a setting, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “2”), it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display state is in the reach mode compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The ratio is lower. In the reach determination data 132A, when the total reserved storage number is “1”, “2” to “3”, “4” to “5”, “6” or more, 4 Although the ratio of the reach mode is reduced as the total number of stored storage is divided into two, this division is arbitrary, and may be divided into less than four or more. In addition, it is arbitrary how the total number of reserved memories is divided. Further, the separation of the total number of reserved memories may be changed depending on which production mode is selected.

  The reach determination data 132B indicates whether or not the decorative display variable display state is set to the reach mode when it is determined that the variable display result is “lost” in the “battle mode”. This is data for determination that is referred to for determination based on the random value MR3. The reach determination data 132B includes determination data assigned to the determination result “no reach” indicating that the reach determination random value MR3 is not in the reach mode. In the setting of the reach determination data 132B, values in the whole range “1” to “100” of the random number MR3 for reach determination are assigned to the determination result indicating that the reach mode is not set. That is, in this embodiment, in the “battle mode”, when it is determined that the variable display result is “lost”, it is determined that the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not set to the reach mode.

  The determination data stored in the ROM 101 includes variation pattern type determination data and variation pattern determination data. In this embodiment, after the variation pattern type is determined based on the variation pattern type determination data, a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination data corresponding to the determined variation pattern type. For example, in the “normal mode” or the like, when the variable display result is “big hit” or “reach lose”, the type of reach production (reach A to reach D) is set based on the variation pattern type determination data. Based on the variation pattern determination data corresponding to the variation pattern type, the presence / absence or type of the main designated effect or other effects, the variation time, and the like are determined. When the variable display result is “non-reach loss”, the presence / absence of the main designated effect and the variation time are determined based on the variation pattern type determination data, and the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination data corresponding to the variation pattern type. Is determined. In the “battle mode”, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the number of attacks of the teammate character, the presence / absence of the reviving effect, and the type are determined based on the variation pattern type determination data, and the variation pattern type is determined. The presence / absence, type, variation time, etc. of other effects (attack method, technique, etc.) are determined based on the variation pattern determination data corresponding to. These divisions are merely examples, and other divisions may be used.

  The variation pattern type determination data includes, for example, jackpot variation pattern type determination data 133A to 133I shown in FIGS. 10 (A) to (E) and FIGS. 11 (A) to (D). The big hit variation pattern type determination data 133A to 133I are used for determining the variation pattern type according to the determination result of the big hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”. The determination data is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR4. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination data 133A to 133I is selected as determination data in accordance with the number of wins in the battle during the big hit type, effect mode, and “battle mode”.

  The big hit variation pattern type determination data (normal mode) 133A to 133C indicate that the determination result of the big hit type in the “normal mode” is “first big hit”, “second big hit”, “third big hit”, and “fourth big hit”. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is changed to the variation pattern type of normal A3-1, super A3-2 to super A3-5, special A4-1, or special A4-2 depending on which of them is “big hit”. It consists of data for determination to be assigned to any of the above.

  Here, as an example, when the big hit type is “first big hit”, the big hit variation pattern type determination data 133A shown in FIG. 10A and the big hit type is “second big hit”. With the big hit variation pattern type determination data 133B shown in FIG. 10B, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type for the variation pattern types of normal A3-1, super A3-2, and super A3-3 is used. The assignment is different. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination data 133A, the random value MR4 for variation pattern type determination is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super A3-4, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination data 133B. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type of the super A3-4. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern type determination data 133A, the random value MR4 for variation pattern type determination is not assigned to the variation pattern type of the super A3-5, whereas in the big hit variation pattern type determination data 133B, A random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super A3-5. As described above, when the presentation mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the “normal mode”, the allocation of the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type differs depending on the type of jackpot, and the jackpot type The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type that differs depending on the. As a result, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types according to the determination result as to which of the plurality of types of jackpot types, and it is possible to vary the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type. Also, since the variation patterns that are easily determined depend on the variation pattern type, it is possible to indicate to the player the degree of expectation that will be the “first big hit” (multi-round special specific gaming state) depending on which variation pattern is Become.

  In particular, in the big hit variation pattern type determination data 133C used when the big hit type is “third big hit” or “fourth big hit”, the big hit types such as special A4-1 and special A4-2 are “first”. When it is other than “3 big hits” or “4 big hits”, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type to which the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned. In this case, when controlling to the 2 round big hit state in response to the variable display result being “big hit” and the big hit type being “third big hit” or “fourth big hit”, controlling to the 15 round big hit state It is possible to determine a different variation pattern type. In this embodiment, when the big hit type is “third big hit” or “fourth big hit”, the common big hit variation pattern type determination data 133C is used, but the big hit type is “first big hit”. It is also possible to prepare determination data in which the allocation of the random number MR4 to the variation pattern type is different depending on whether it is “3 big hits” or “4th big hit”. By doing so, it is possible to indicate to the player the degree of expectation that will result in a probable variation state depending on which variation pattern.

  For the big hit variation pattern type determination data (chance mode / super hot mode) 133D, 133E, the determination result of the big hit type in “chance mode” or “super hot mode” is either “first big hit” or “second big hit” The random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is used as the variation of the chance C3-1 and the chance C4-1 depending on whether it is “third big hit” or “fourth big hit”. It consists of data for determination assigned to one of the pattern types. With such a setting, it becomes possible to determine different variation pattern types according to the determination result of which of the multiple types of jackpot types in the “chance mode”, and the ratio determined to the same variation pattern type Can be different.

  The big hit variation pattern type determination data (battle mode) 133F to 133I indicate that the determination result of the big hit type in the “battle mode” is “first big hit”, “second big hit”, “third big hit”, “fourth big hit” The random pattern value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is determined according to the number of battle wins and the battle wins B3-1 and B3- according to the number of battle wins. 2, data for determination to be assigned to any one of the variation pattern types of B3-3, battle loss B4-1, and B4-2. With such settings, it becomes possible to determine different variation pattern types according to the determination result of which one of multiple types of jackpot types in “Battle Mode” and the number of battle wins, and to the same variation pattern type The determined ratio can be varied.

  As an example, in the big hit variation pattern type determination data 133F and 133G used when the big hit type is “first big hit”, it is determined as one of the fluctuation pattern types of battle wins B3-1 to B3-3, In the big hit variation pattern type determination data 133H, 133I used when the big hit type is one of “second big hit”, “third big hit”, or “fourth big hit”, the battle loss B4-1 or B4-2 The change pattern type is determined. As a result, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “second big hit”, “third big hit”, or “fourth big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. The case where the losing effect is executed) and the case where the big hit game state is controlled according to the fact that the big hit type is “first big win” (when the effect that the teammate character wins) are determined to be different variation pattern types. can do.

  As another example, focusing on the case where the big hit type is determined as “first big hit”, the big hit variation pattern type determination data 133G used when the number of battle wins is 2, 5, or 8 Compared with the big hit variation pattern type determination data 133F used when the number of battle wins is other than 2, 5, and 8, the big win variation pattern type determination data 133F has a battle win B3-1, B3-2. While the random pattern value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the variation pattern type, the variation pattern type determination for the variation pattern type of the battle win B3-3 is performed in the variation pattern type determination data 133G for jackpot. Is assigned a random value MR4. Here, the variation pattern type of the battle win B3-1 includes a variation pattern in which the relief effect is executed and a variation pattern in which the relief effect is not executed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15A, the variation pattern type of the battle win B3-2 includes only the variation pattern for executing the promotion effect, and the variation pattern type of the battle win B3-3 is the relief effect. It contains only the variation pattern to be executed. That is, when the number of battle wins is 2, 5, or 8, the relief effect is always executed. In this way, depending on the number of battle wins, it is possible to vary the execution ratio of the relief effect when it becomes the “first big hit” and vary the effect. Further, focusing on the case where the jackpot type is determined to be “third jackpot”, the jackpot variation pattern type determination data 133I used when the number of battle wins is 2, 5, and 8, and the number of battle wins is When compared with the big hit variation pattern type determination data 133H used in cases other than 2, 5, and 8 times, the big hit variation pattern type determination data 133H has the battle loss B4-1 and B4-2 variation pattern types. On the other hand, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern type with respect to the variation pattern type of the battle loss B4-1. Is assigned. Here, as shown in FIG. 15A, the variation pattern type of the battle loss B4-1 includes only the variation pattern that falls from the “battle mode” to the “chance mode”, and the variation pattern type of the battle loss B4-2. Includes only the fluctuation pattern in which the “battle mode” continues. In other words, if the number of battle wins is 2, 5, or 8 and it becomes “3rd big hit”, it always falls from the battle mode to chance mode, and if the number of battle wins is other than 2, 5, 8 or 8 "Battle mode" continues at a rate of 80% (80/100). Thus, according to the number of battle wins, the battle mode continuation ratio when the “third big hit” is reached can be varied. The variation pattern type of battle loss B4-1 and the variation pattern type of battle loss B4-2 are each configured to include only one variation pattern, but may include a plurality of variation patterns. In this case, the same variation pattern type may include only the variation pattern of the battle mode continuation and the variation pattern of the battle mode falling. By doing this, there are a variety of effects when losing a battle.

  As described above, depending on whether the production mode is “normal mode”, “battle mode”, or “chance mode” or “extremely hot mode”, the variation for big hit By using the pattern type determination data 133A to 133I, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on the production mode. In the case of the “battle mode”, the variation pattern type is one of a plurality of types depending on whether the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B performs variable display. The determined ratio may be different. As an example, in the big hit variation pattern type determination data 133H shown in FIG. 11C, the allocation of the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type to the variation pattern types of the battle losses B4-1 and B4-2 is changed. The figure designation buffer value may be varied depending on whether it is “1” or “2”. More specifically, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the variation pattern type of battle loss B4-2 is larger than when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”. The random value MR4 may be assigned. In this case, when variable display is executed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the battle mode continuation ratio is higher than when variable display is executed on the second special symbol display device 4B. The continuation ratio can be varied.

  The variation pattern type determination data stored in the ROM 101 includes reach-losing variation pattern type determination data 134 shown in FIG. The variation pattern type determination data 134 for reach losing indicates the change pattern type when the variable display state of the decorative symbol is determined to be the reach state in the “normal mode”, “chance mode”, and “super hot mode”. The determination data is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern type and the total reserved storage number. The variation pattern type determination data 134 for reach-losing uses the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type as a normal A2-1, depending on whether the total number of reserved memories is “3” or less or “4” or more. It consists of determination data assigned to one of the variation pattern types of super A2-2 and super A2-3. In the “battle mode”, since it is determined not to reach the reach state, the reach / losing variation pattern type determination data 134 is not used.

  Here, in the setting of the variation pattern type determination data 134 for reach-losing, “1” to “60” among the random value MR4 for determination of the variation pattern type corresponding to the total number of reserved memories being “3” or less. Are assigned to the variation pattern type of normal A2-1, and other random values are assigned to the variation pattern types of super A2-2 and super A2-3. Corresponding to the total number of reserved memories being “4” or more, the value in the range of “1” to “70” of the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is changed to the variation pattern type of normal A2-1. Assign to. With these settings, when the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “4”) or more, the fluctuation pattern of the normal A2-1 in which the “normal” reach effect is executed is compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The rate determined for the type increases. And the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern that executes the “normal” reach production is set to be shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern that executes the reach production other than “normal”. If so, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure variation time can be shortened as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  The variation pattern type determination data stored in the ROM 101 includes non-reach loss variation pattern type determination data 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. The non-reach loss variation pattern type determination data 135A to 135C includes the variation pattern type, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type, and the total when it is determined that the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not the reach state. This is data for determination that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the number of reserved memories. Each of the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination data 135A to 135C is one of the “normal mode”, the “battle mode”, the “chance mode”, and the “super hot mode”. Depending on the case, it is selected as determination data. That is, non-reach loss variation pattern type determination data (normal mode) 135A is selected in the “normal mode”, and non-reach loss variation pattern type determination data (battle mode) in the “battle mode”. ) 135B is selected, and if it is one of the “chance mode” and the “super hot mode”, the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination data (chance mode / super hot mode) 135C is selected. Each of the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination data 135A to 135C stores the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type in accordance with whether the total reserved storage number is “3” or less or “4” or more. It consists of determination data assigned to any one of the variation pattern types of reach A1-1 to non-reach A1-3, non-reach B1-1 to non-reach B1-4, non-reach C1-1 to non-reach C1-4. ing.

  The variation pattern determination data stored in the ROM 101 includes jackpot variation pattern determination data 136A to 136C shown in FIGS. 14, 15A and 15B. The big hit variation pattern determination data 136A to 136C are used to determine the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”. This is determination data that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR5. Each big hit variation pattern determination data 136A to 136C is selected as determination data in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, depending on the result of the determination that the normal pattern is one of normal A3-1, super A3-2 to super A3-5, special A4-1 to special A4-2, which is the variation pattern type for big hit in the “normal mode” The variation pattern judgment data (normal mode) 136A is selected, and the battle pattern B3-1, battle win B3-2, battle loss B4-1, battle loss B4-2, which are the big hit variation pattern types in the “battle mode”. Big hit fluctuation pattern determination data (battle mode) 136B is selected in accordance with the determination result indicating that it is one of chance C3-1 and chance C3-, which are the big hit fluctuation pattern types of “chance mode” or “super hot mode”. Depending on the result of the decision to be one of 2, the data for determining the big hit fluctuation pattern (chance mode / super hot mode) 136C is selected. Each jackpot variation pattern determination data 136A to 136C includes a random number MR5 for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display result is “big hit”. It consists of data for determination to be assigned to any of the above. In FIG. 14, fluctuation patterns with a main designated effect such as “slip” and “pseudo-run” are indicated by “◯” in the “main designated effect” column.

  The variation pattern determination data stored in the ROM 101 includes reach-losing variation pattern determination data 137 shown in FIG. The reach-losing variation pattern determination data 137 indicates that when the variable display result is determined to be “losing”, the variation pattern is changed according to the determination result to reach the reach state. This is judgment data that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the numerical value MR5. The variation pattern determination data 137 for reach lose is the random value MR5 for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, when the variable display result of the decorative symbol is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”. It consists of determination data assigned to any one of a plurality of corresponding variation patterns. Note that, in FIG. 16, fluctuation patterns with a main designated effect such as “slip” or “pseudo-run” are indicated by “◯” in the “main designated effect” column.

  The variation pattern determination data stored in the ROM 101 includes non-reach loss variation pattern determination data 138A to 138C shown in FIGS. The variation pattern determination data 138A to 138C for non-reach loss is determined when the variable display result is determined to be “lost” and the variation pattern is determined as the variation pattern according to the determination result that the reach state is not set. This is determination data that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR5. Each of the non-reach lose variation pattern determination data 138A to 138C is selected as determination data according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the non-reach loss variation pattern determination data (normal mode) 138A according to the determination result indicating that any of non-reach A1-1 to non-reach A1-3, which is the non-reach loss variation pattern type in the “normal mode”. Is selected, and the non-reach variation pattern determination data (battle mode) is selected in accordance with the determination result indicating that the non-reach B1-1 to non-reach B1-4 are non-reach variation pattern types in the “battle mode”. ) 138B is selected, and the variation for non-reach loss is determined according to the determination result indicating that it is one of non-reach C1-1 to non-reach C1-4, which is the non-reach variation pattern type of “chance mode” or “super hot mode” Pattern determination data (chance mode / super hot mode) 138C is selected. The variation pattern determination data 138A to 138C for non-reach loss is a random value MR5 for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, the variable display result of the decorative symbol is “losing”, and the variable display mode is not “reach” It consists of determination data assigned to one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case. Note that, in FIG. 17A, fluctuation patterns with main designated effects such as “slip” and “pseudo-continuous” are indicated by “◯” in the “main designated effects” column.

  Here, in the setting of the non-reach loss variation pattern determination data 138A shown in FIG. 17A, main designations such as non-reach 3 and non-reach 4 corresponding to the case of the non-reach A1-3 variation pattern type. A random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the effect. With such a setting, even in the case of “non-reach lose”, reach A2 and reach A3, which are fluctuation patterns in the case of “big hit” shown in FIG. 14, and “reach lose” shown in FIG. As in the case of the change pattern, such as reach lose A2, reach lose A3, etc., it is possible to execute an effect operation as a main designated effect. In addition, in the setting of the non-reach loss variation pattern determination data 138A, the non-reach 1 variation pattern type (determined when the total number of reserved storage is 3 or less) is set for the non-reach 1 The variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach A1-2 variation pattern type (determined when the total number of reserved memories is 4 or more), and is determined to be a non-reach 2 variation pattern. In the setting of the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 6, the special figure fluctuation time T2 corresponding to the non-reach 2 fluctuation pattern is set shorter than the special figure fluctuation time T1 corresponding to the non-reach 1 fluctuation pattern. With this setting, when the production mode is the “normal mode”, the average special figure change time when the total number of reserved memories is 4 or more can be made shorter than when the total drawing storage time is 3 or less. The special figure fluctuation times T3 and T4 corresponding to the non-reach 3 and non-reach 4 fluctuation patterns for executing the main designated effect are both set longer than the special figure fluctuation time T1 corresponding to the non-reach 1 fluctuation pattern. Is done. In the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination data 135A shown in FIG. 13A, the variation pattern type is determined to be non-reach A1-3 when the total number of reserved storage is 4 or more than when it is 3 or less. The rate of being reduced is decreasing. By doing in this way, the generation ratio of the main designated effect when the total number of reserved memories is 4 or more can be reduced, and the average special figure fluctuation time can be shortened.

  In the setting of the non-reach loss variation pattern determination data 138B, the non-reach B1-1 variation pattern is determined corresponding to the non-reach B1-1 variation pattern type, and the non-reach B1-2 variation pattern type. Corresponding to the case, the non-reach 6 variation pattern is determined. In addition, the non-reach B1-3 variation pattern type is determined to be the non-reach 7 variation pattern, and the non-reach B1-4 variation pattern type is determined to be the non-reach 8 variation pattern type. It is determined. Here, in the setting of the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 6, the special figure fluctuation time T5 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach 5 and the special figure fluctuation time T6 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach 6 are the fluctuation patterns of the non-reach 7. Is set longer than the special figure fluctuation time T7 corresponding to the non-reach 8 fluctuation pattern T7. Then, according to the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination data 135B shown in FIG. 13B, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the total number of pending storages is 3 or less, or 4 or more. If the variation pattern type of non-reach B1-1, B1-2 is determined according to whether there is a variation special figure designation buffer value of “2”, the total number of pending storage is 3 or more or 4 or more Is determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach B1-3, B1-4. Therefore, in the “battle mode”, the special figure change in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A corresponding to the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value being “1”. Corresponding to the fact that the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the time is longer than the special figure fluctuation time in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Set. Further, the special figure fluctuation time T6 corresponding to the non-reach 6 fluctuation pattern only needs to be set shorter than the special figure fluctuation time T5 corresponding to the non-reach 5 fluctuation pattern, and corresponds to the non-reach 8 fluctuation pattern. The special figure fluctuation time T8 may be set shorter than the special figure fluctuation time T7 corresponding to the non-reach 7 fluctuation pattern. With this setting, even when the effect mode is “battle mode”, the average special figure change time when the total number of reserved memories is 4 or more can be made shorter than when the total number of reserved figures is 3 or less.

  In the setting of the non-reach loss variation pattern determination data 138C, the non-reach C1-1 variation pattern is determined corresponding to the non-reach C1-1 variation pattern type, and becomes the non-reach C1-2 variation pattern type. The non-reach 10 variation pattern is determined corresponding to the case. The non-reach C1-3 variation pattern type is determined to correspond to the non-reach C11 variation pattern, and the non-reach C1-4 variation pattern type is determined to correspond to the non-reach C1-4 variation pattern type. To be determined. Here, in the setting of the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 6, the special figure fluctuation time T9 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach 9 and the special figure fluctuation time T10 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach 10 are the fluctuation patterns of the non-reach 11. Is set longer than the special figure fluctuation time T12 corresponding to the non-reach 12 fluctuation pattern T11. Then, according to the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination data 135C shown in FIG. 13C, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the total number of pending storage is 3 or less, or 4 or more. If the variation pattern type of non-reach C1-1 and C1-2 is determined according to whether there is a variation special figure designation buffer value of “2”, the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, or 4 or more Is determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach C1-3, C1-4. Therefore, in the “chance mode” or the “super hot mode”, the special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A corresponding to the fact that the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”. The special figure change time in the special figure change time in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B corresponding to the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value being “2”. Set a longer time. Further, the special figure fluctuation time T10 corresponding to the non-reach 10 fluctuation pattern only needs to be set shorter than the special figure fluctuation time T9 corresponding to the non-reach 9 fluctuation pattern, and corresponds to the non-reach 12 fluctuation pattern. The special figure fluctuation time T12 may be set shorter than the special figure fluctuation time T11 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach 11. By such setting, even when the production mode is “chance mode” or “gekiatsu mode”, the average special figure fluctuation time when the total number of reserved memories is 4 or more is shorter than when the total number of reserved memories is 3 or less. Can do.

  In the big hit variation pattern determination data 136A shown in FIG. 14, variation pattern reach A1 to reach A3 are variation patterns with reach A (normal reach), and variation pattern reach B1 to reach B3 are reach B (super reach). 1), the variation pattern reach C1 to reach C3 is a variation pattern with reach C (super reach 2), and the variation pattern reach D1 to reach D3 is reach D (super reach 3). It is a fluctuation pattern with In addition, in the variation pattern determination data 137 shown in FIG. 16, the variation pattern reach loss A1 to reach loss A3 is a variation pattern with reach A (normal reach), and the variation pattern reach lose B1 to reach loss B3 is reach B ( The variation pattern with super reach 1), and the variation pattern reach loss C1 to reach loss C3 are variation patterns with reach C (super reach 2). Thus, in this embodiment, a variation pattern with a similar reach mode is set as one variation pattern type. When adding a variation pattern within the same variation pattern type or changing the setting of the variation pattern occurrence rate, it is only necessary to change the setting of the random value MR5 within the variation pattern type. Time and random time setting time can be shortened. In addition, when adding the reach mode and adding the variation pattern type, or changing the setting of the occurrence rate of the reach mode (variation pattern type), only the setting of the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is changed. Therefore, the development time of the gaming machine and the setting time of the random value can be shortened.

  FIG. 18 shows a configuration example of the general map display result determination data 139 stored in the ROM 101. Before the fixed normal symbol that becomes the variable display result in the normal symbol game on the normal symbol display 20 is derived and displayed, the normal display result determination data 139 is set to the variable display result as “per normal symbol” for the second start. Whether or not to perform tilt control to make the game ball easy to enter the winning opening, whether or not the numerical data indicating the random value MR6 for determining the normal chart display result matches the determination value data per normal chart This is data for determination that is referred to for determination based on the result. The general-purpose display result determination data 139 includes a random-number value MR6 for general-purpose display result determination according to whether the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 shown in FIG. 19 is OFF or ON. It consists of setting data (determination data) and the like associated with (assigned to) common figure determination value data and common figure loss determination value data. Further, the normal map display result determination data 139 sets the normal map variation time to one of a plurality of types according to the determination result of whether or not the random number MR6 matches the determination value data per universal map. Time setting (tilting control time) that makes the second start winning opening enter a state where the game ball can easily enter when the random number value MR6 matches the determination value data for each figure, It may include setting data for setting depending on whether is off or on.

  In the setting of the general map display result determination data 139 shown in FIG. 18, the random number value MR6 for general map display result determination is in the range of “1” to “15” corresponding to the case where the time reduction flag is off. While assigning the value to the judgment value data per common figure, the random number value MR6 for judging the general figure display result is assigned a value in the range of “1” to “140” corresponding to the case where the time reduction flag is on. Assigned to the judgment value data per figure. With such a setting, when the time reduction flag is on corresponding to the probability change state or the time reduction state, the variable display result in the general game is “ The probability of “per normal” is increased, and the frequency of tilt control for making the second start winning opening easy to enter the game ball can be increased. Further, the normal time fluctuation times TH3 and TH4 corresponding to when the time reduction flag is on are set shorter than the normal time fluctuation times TH1 and TH2 corresponding to when the time reduction flag is off. With such a setting, when the time reduction flag is on corresponding to the probability change state or the time reduction state, the normal time fluctuation time in the normal game is shorter than when the time reduction flag is off corresponding to the normal state. Thus, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the tilt control is performed so that the game ball can easily win the second start winning opening. In addition, the normal map fluctuation times TH1 and TH2 corresponding to the time flag being off are the special charts according to the first special chart corresponding to the case where the variable chart designation buffer value is “1” during the “battle mode”. A special figure game according to the first special figure corresponding to the case where the special figure fluctuation time T5, T6 in the figure game or the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1” during the “chance mode” or “extremely hot mode”. Are set shorter than the special figure fluctuation times T9 and T10. Accordingly, when one of the “battle mode”, “chance mode”, and “super hot mode”, the first special symbol display device 4A uses the first special symbol display device 4A corresponding to the fact that the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”. The special figure change time in the special figure game using the special figure is longer than the normal figure change time in the normal figure game using the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 in the normal state other than the probability change state and the short-time state. Set to time. Further, the tilt control time TK2 corresponding to the time reduction flag being on is set longer than the tilt control time TK1 corresponding to the time reduction flag being off. With such a setting, when the time reduction flag is on, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening than when it is off.

  In the RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2, game control as shown in FIG. 19 is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A data holding area 150 is provided. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 19 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A is a special game in which a game ball wins a first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting condition is satisfied but the first starting condition is not satisfied. The hold data of (a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure hold storage unit 151A is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the first start condition by winning in association with the hold number in the order of winning in the first start winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type are set as the pending data and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). .

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B receives the game ball in the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and the second start condition is satisfied, but the second start condition is not satisfied. Hold data of a game (a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the winning in association with the holding number in the winning order to the second starting winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type are set as the pending data and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). .

  In this embodiment, the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is executed in preference to the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. That is, regardless of whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied first, if there is hold data in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B, the hold data is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A. Even if it exists, the 2nd start condition is satisfied first and the special figure game by the 2nd special symbol display apparatus 4B is started. On the other hand, the order in which the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied may be determined according to the order in which the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied. In this case, a storage area serving as a start data storage unit may be provided in the game control data holding area 150. The start data storage unit stores start data indicating which game ball has won in either the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, so that the order of winning of each game ball can be specified. As an example, the start data storage unit stores “first” start data corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening, or “second” start data corresponding to winning in the second starting winning opening, Each game ball is stored in association with a hold number according to the winning order. Then, when the start condition for starting the special figure game is satisfied, it depends on whether the start data stored in the top entry in the start data storage unit is “first” or “second” Thus, it may be determined which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied.

  Although the condition for executing the usual game by the normal symbol display 20 is established when the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 and the normal figure holding memory 151C has passed, Pending information relating to the usual game for which variable display has not started due to reasons such as being executed is stored. For example, the general-purpose hold storage unit 151C associates with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passing gate 41, and based on the count value from the random number circuit 104 or the random counter by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. The extracted numerical data indicating the random number value MR6 for determining the normal map display result is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, a mode flag, and the like.

  The special figure process flag indicates the progress of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, the progress of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. In step S15 of FIG. 29 executed for control and the special symbol process shown in FIG. 30, which process is to be selected and executed is instructed. The ordinary symbol process flag indicates which process in the ordinary symbol process shown in FIG. 29 or the ordinary symbol process shown in FIG. Indicates whether to select and execute.

  The big hit flag is set to an on state corresponding to the determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, it is cleared and turned off in response to, for example, that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. The probability change flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the probability change state, and is cleared to the off state in response to the end of the probability change state. . The time reduction flag is set to an on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to a probability change state or a time reduction state, while being cleared in response to completion of the probability change state or the time reduction state. Is turned off. The mode flag indicates whether the current game mode is the normal mode, the battle mode, the chance mode, or the intense game mode.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, a time for controlling the progress of the big hit gaming state on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to a time measured to control the progress of the big hit gaming state, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the game control process timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time, such as a start time of a big hit gaming state, and counts up periodically.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as a special figure variation time which is the execution time of the special figure game. As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The normal map change timer is for measuring the time for controlling the progress of the normal game, such as the normal map change time, which is the execution time of the normal game, on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a random counter, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, a total reserved memory number counter, a round number counter, a battle victory number counter, and the like. Yes.

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 counts a part of numerical data indicating a random number value used for controlling the progress of the game, separately from the random number circuit 104, so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software. belongs to. For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR6 is stored as a random count value. The numerical data indicating the numerical value is updated.

  The first reserved memory number counter is for counting the first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A. For example, in the first reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the first reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory number counter is for counting the second reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B. For example, in the second reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the second reserved memory number is stored as the second reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The total reserved memory number counter is for counting the total reserved memory number obtained by adding up the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total reserved memory number is stored in the total reserved memory number counter as a total reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the total reserved memory number )

  The round number counter is for counting the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. Then, when one round is completed and the next round is started, the round number count value is incremented by 1 and updated.

  The battle victory number counter is for counting the number of times of winning the battle during the “battle mode” (the number of times of “first big hit”) as the battle victory number count value. For example, the battle win count value is incremented by 1 every time the “first big hit” is reached, and is reset to “0” when the “normal mode” is entered. In place of the battle win count counter, the battle execution count counter for counting the number of times the battle was executed during the “battle mode” (the number of times the variable display result was “big hit”) as the battle execution count count value. May be provided. For example, the battle execution count value is incremented by 1 each time the variable display result is a “big hit” regardless of whether the battle in “Battle Mode” is won or lost, and the “Normal Mode” is entered. It may be reset to “0”.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a variable special figure designation buffer, a jackpot type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer includes a plurality of buffer areas (for example, “12”), and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM 101 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area where setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and a plurality of buffer areas may be used as a ring buffer.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, when the first start condition is satisfied in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, the value of the variable special figure designation buffer ( Fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) is set to "1". Further, in response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, when the second start condition is satisfied, the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”. "Is set. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0” in response to the completion of the special figure game.

  In the big hit type buffer, there are a plurality of decorative display variable display modes when the variable display result is “big hit”, such as “first big hit”, “second big hit”, “third big hit”, and “fourth big hit”. A buffer value corresponding to the determination result of which type of jackpot type is determined is stored. As an example, based on the setting in the big hit type determination data 131 as shown in FIG. 8, when the big hit type is “first big hit”, the big hit type buffer value (big hit type buffer value) is set to “00”. When the jackpot type is “second jackpot”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “01”, and when the jackpot type is “third jackpot”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “02”. When the jackpot type is “fourth jackpot”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “03”. In the fluctuation start total reserved memory number buffer, the total reserved memory number read at the time of starting the fluctuation of the special figure game in the first special figure or the second special figure is temporarily stored. When the variable display result is “losing”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “00”, and when the big hit type is “first big hit”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “01” (hereinafter referred to as “big hit”). The type buffer value may be shifted by 1), and it may be possible to determine whether the variable display result is “big hit” as well as the big hit type based on the big hit type buffer value.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for taking in various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124, an I / O 125, and an RTCM (real time clock module) 126 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes a program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric parts is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed. The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal to the sound control board 13, and a lamp control board 14. On the other hand, wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal is connected. Furthermore, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal corresponding to the operation mode as an information signal from the operation button 30 is also connected to the effect control board 12.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. 20, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 12, random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, random values SR2 for determining the reach symbol The numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for the pre-battle notice determination and the random value SR4 for the post-battle notice determination are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit 124 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4. The effect control CPU 120 uses various random counters different from the random number circuit 124 such as a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of the numerical values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4 may be counted. When the random number circuit 124 is not mounted on the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 uses a random counter to indicate all the random values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4. Data may be counted.

  The random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “left” and “middle” in the display area of the image display device 5 as fixed decorative symbols that are variable display results of decorative symbols. , A random number value used to determine a decorative symbol (final stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the final stop symbol here is finally stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the decorative symbol variable display ends. These are the three decorative designs. As an example, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is “1” to “ The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “96”.

  The random value SR2 for determining the reach symbol is used to determine a decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R when the variable display result is a reach lose combination. This is a random value to be used, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random number SR3 for the pre-battle notice determination is used to determine whether or not the notice effect is to be executed before the execution of the battle effect in the battle mode, and whether the notice pattern type is to be one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. Is a random value used in the range of “1” to “100”. The random value SR4 for determining the notice after the battle is for determining whether or not the notice effect is executed after the execution of the battle effect in the battle mode, and for determining whether the notice pattern type is one of a plurality of kinds prepared in advance. This is a random value to be used, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various selection data used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of determination data and selection data prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, selections, and settings, and table data constituting a control pattern table.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 121, for example, final stop symbol determination data 160A shown in FIGS. 21A to 21C as determination data for determining a fixed decorative symbol that is one of the predetermined non-reach combinations. ~ 160C is included. The final stop symbol determination data 160A shown in FIG. 21 (A) is the left that becomes the finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L among the predetermined decorative symbols that are the predetermined non-reach combinations. This is determination data referred to for determining the final stop symbol FZ1-1 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination data 160A is data for determination that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. Etc. The final stop symbol determination data 160B shown in FIG. 21 (B) is a right that becomes a confirmed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R among the predetermined decorative symbols that are a predetermined non-reach combination. This is decision data referred to for determining the final stop symbol FZ1-2 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 or the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination data 160B includes the second final stop symbol determination random number SR1-2 according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. , Data for determination to be assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. The final stop symbol determination data 160C shown in FIG. 21C is a fixed ornament symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” ornament symbol display area 5C among the fixed ornament symbols that are a predetermined non-reach combination. For determining the final stop symbol FZ1-3 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol, etc. It is data. For example, by assigning a random number value for each symbol determination data, symbols that are temporarily stopped during “pseudo-continuous” or “development chance” symbols will not appear when non-reach loses when the main designated effect is not executed. Can be.

  Here, the determination data stored in the ROM 121 includes left / right outcome determination data 161 as shown in FIG. 22, and a combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. Therefore, it is determined whether the left / right output type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. The final stop symbol determination data 160C includes a random number SR1 for determining the third final stop symbol according to the determination result of whether the left / right outcome type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. -3 is made up of determination data and the like assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that are the middle final stop symbols FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination data 160B shown in FIG. 21B, the symbol number of the decorative symbol that is the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the symbol number of the decorative symbol that is the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are the same. The part is not assigned the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. With such an assignment, when a finalized symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the combination of the finalized symbol can be prevented from becoming a reach combination or a jackpot combination.

  The determination data stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, reach symbol determination data 162 shown in FIG. 23 as determination data for determining a final decorative symbol to be a reach-losing combination. The reach symbol determination data 162 shown in FIG. 23 includes a left final stop symbol that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L among the fixed decorative symbols that are the reach-losing combinations, and “right The right final stop symbol F, which is the final symbol to be stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5R, is determined data that is referred to in order to determine the random symbol value SR2 for determining the reach symbol. The reach symbol determination data 162 includes the symbol number “” of the decorative symbols (left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1, FZ2-2) that make the reach symbol determination random number SR2 the same as the left final stop symbol and the right final stop symbol. It consists of data for determination assigned to “1” to “8”. Further, as shown in FIG. 23, a plurality of patterns of reach symbol determination data 162 are prepared according to the total number of reserved memories. In this embodiment, the reach symbol having the same symbol number as the total number of reserved memories when reaching a reach loss is assigned a random number SR3 for reach symbol determination or less. That is, in the case of the reach mode with the same symbol number as the total number of reserved memories, the reach mode (symbol numbers “1”, “2”, “4” to “6”, “8”) that tends to be “big hit”, or the iron plate The setting data is configured to reach reach (symbol numbers “3” and “7”).

  In addition, in order to avoid the middle final stop symbol constituting the reach-losing combination from being a jackpot combination, a decorative symbol other than the symbol number that is the same as or larger than the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol or the right final stop symbol May be selected.

  The determination data stored in the ROM 121 includes jackpot symbol determination data for determining a jackpot combination. In this embodiment, as the big hit symbol determining data, the first big hit symbol determining data 163A shown in FIG. 24 (A), the first and second big hit symbol determining data 163B shown in FIG. 24 (B), The third and fourth big hit combination determination data 163C shown in FIG. 24C is prepared in advance. The first big hit symbol determination data 163A determines a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a probable variation big hit combination based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol when the big hit type is “first big hit”. This is data for determination to be referred to. In the first big hit symbol determination data 163A, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Are assigned to symbol numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7”. The first and second big hit symbol determination data 163B is used to determine a final decorative symbol for determining the first final stop symbol when the big hit type is “first big hit” or “second big hit”. This is data for determination referred to for determination based on the random value SR1-1. In the first and second big hit symbol determining data 163B, the random symbol values SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol are displayed as the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Are assigned to symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” of the normal symbols that become the same. When the big hit type is “first big hit”, whether the first big hit symbol determination data 163A or the first / second big hit symbol determination data 163B is used is during a round in the big hit gaming state, etc. It may be determined in accordance with the determination result of whether or not to execute the promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that is in a certain change state.

  The third and fourth big hit symbol determination data 163C is the first final stop for the big hit combination (third big hit combination / fourth big hit combination) when the big hit type is "third big hit" or "fourth big hit" This is data for determination that is referred to for determination based on the random number SR1-1 for determining symbols. The third / fourth big hit combination determining data 163 is made up of determining data for assigning the first final stop symbol determining random number SR1-1 to the third big hit combination / fourth big hit combination. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24C, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5, “1 · 2・ 1 、 「2 ・ 3 ・ 2」 、 「3 ・ 4 ・ 3」 、 「4 ・ 5 ・ 4」 、 「5 ・ 6 ・ 5」 、 「6 ・ 7 ・ 6」 、 「7 ・ 8 ・ 7 ”And“ 8 · 1 · 8 ”are combinations of third big hits or fourth big hit combinations. In addition, although the 3rd big hit combination and the 4th big hit combination were made into the combination of a common decorative design, you may prepare a different combination, respectively.

  The data for selection stored in the ROM 121 includes data for selection of a notice for determining the presence / absence of a notice effect to be a notice effect before a battle or a notice effect after a battle and an effect mode. In this embodiment, pre-battle notice selection data 170 shown in FIG. 25 (A) and post-battle notice selection data 171 shown in FIG. 25 (B) are prepared in advance as the notice selection data. . The pre-battle notice selection data 170 includes whether or not to execute the pre-battle notice effect based on the random number SR3 for the pre-battle notice determination, and a plurality of types of the notice pattern when executing the notice pattern (notice A to notice C ) For selection to determine one of the following.

  In the pre-battle notice selection data 170, the allocation of the random number SR3 differs depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “losing” and the type of big hit. Further, when the variable display result is “losing”, the assignment of the random number SR3 differs depending on which of the variable display results is the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, when the variable display result of the first special symbol display device 4A is “losing”, a value (90%) in the range of “1” to “90” among the random numbers is assigned without notice, and the notice A A value (7%) in the range of “91” to “97” is assigned to the notice pattern, and a value (3%) in the range of “98” to “100” is assigned to the notice pattern of notice B. When the variable display result of the second special symbol display device 4B is “losing”, a value (80%) in the range of “1” to “80” among the random numbers is assigned without notice, and the notice pattern of notice A A value in the range of “81” to “97” (17%) is assigned to “1”, and a value in the range of “98” to “100” (3%) is assigned to the notice pattern of the notice B. That is, when the variable display result is “losing”, the proportion of the pre-battle announcement effect is low (10% or 20% is executed). Further, the pre-battle notice effect is more easily executed when the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B is executed (20% execution) than when the first special symbol display device 4A is variable display (10% execution). It has become. When the variable display result is “first big hit”, a value (20%) in the range of “1” to “20” is assigned without random notice, and “21” to “ A value in the range of “50” (30%) is assigned, a value in the range of “51” to “96” (46%) is assigned to the notice pattern of notice B, and a value of “97” to “ A value in the range of “100” (4%) is allocated. When the variable display result is “second big hit”, a value (20%) in the range of “1” to “20” is assigned among the random numbers without notice, and “21” to “ A value in the range of “50” (30%) is assigned, and a value in the range of “51” to “100” (50%) is assigned to the notice pattern of notice B. When the variable display result is “3rd big hit” or “4th big hit”, a value (20%) in the range of “1” to “20” is assigned without random notice, and the notice pattern of notice A A value in the range of “21” to “80” (60%) is assigned to “1”, and a value in the range of “81” to “100” (20%) is assigned to the notice pattern of the notice B.

  With this setting, the pre-battle announcement effect is executed more frequently (80% is executed) when the variable display result is “big hit”. In addition, when the pre-battle notice effect of the notice C is executed, it is determined that it becomes “first big hit”. Then, the ratio of “first big hit” or “second big hit” is greater when the pre-battle notice effect of the notice B is executed than when the notice effect before the notice of the notice A is executed. It is set higher than the ratio of “third big hit” or “fourth big hit”. In this way, whether or not the pre-battle announcement effect is executed, the reliability that is “big hit” depending on the type, the ratio of which type of big hit is (the ratio that “battle mode” continues, Since the ratio of any one of the two round big hit states) is different, the player's expectation can be enhanced by the pre-battle notice effect.

  The after-battle notice selection data 171 shown in FIG. 25 (B) indicates whether or not the after-battle notice effect is executed based on the random value SR4 for after-battle notice determination, and the type of the notice pattern when it is executed. This is data for selection for determining one of a plurality of types (notice D1, notice D2, notice E1, notice E2).

  The post-battle notice selection data 171 may vary depending on whether the variable display result (big hit type) is “first big hit” or “second big hit”, “third big hit” or “fourth big hit”. The assignment of numerical value SR4 is different. When the jackpot type is “first jackpot” or “second jackpot”, a value (20%) in the range of “1” to “20” among random numbers is assigned without notice, and the notice pattern of notice D1 A value in the range of “21” to “38” (18%) is assigned, and a value in the range of “39” and “40” (2%) is assigned to the notice pattern of notice D1, and the notice pattern of notice E1 A value (60%) in the range of “41” to “100” is allocated. When the variable display result is “3rd big hit” or “4th big hit”, a value (20%) in the range of “1” to “20” is assigned without random notice, and the notice pattern of notice D1 Is assigned a value in the range of “21” and “22” (2%), a value in the range of “21” to “80” (58%) is assigned to the notice pattern of the notice D2, and a notice pattern of the notice E2 A value (20%) in the range of “81” to “100” is assigned to the.

  With such a setting, the case where the post-battle notice effect of the notice E (notice E1, notice E2) is executed is more than the case where the notice effect after the battle of the notice D (notice D1, notice D2) is executed. The ratio of “first big hit” or “second big hit” is set higher than the ratio of “third big hit” or “fourth big hit”. In this way, the ratio of which jackpot type (the ratio at which the “battle mode” continues or the ratio of either the 15 round jackpot state or the 2 round jackpot state) differs depending on the type of post-battle notice effect. The player's expectation can be enhanced by the post-battle notice effect.

  As the control pattern table stored in the ROM 121, for example, an effect control pattern table 180 having a configuration as shown in FIG. 26 is used. The effect control pattern table 180 includes various data such as data indicating display control commands to be transmitted to the display control board 13, contents of audio output control of the speakers 8L, 8R, etc., contents of effects by the game effect lamp 9, etc. It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of effect control as effect control patterns. The plurality of types of effect control patterns stored in the effect control pattern table 180 are, for example, as shown in FIG. 27, effect control process timer setting values, effect control process timer determination values # 1 to #n (n is an arbitrary natural number) ), Display control data # 1 to #n, audio control data # 1 to #n, lamp control data # 1 to #n, and various codes for controlling the production operation, such as an end code. The display control command to be transmitted to the display control board 13, the contents of the various effects control such as the contents of the sound output from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, the contents of the effects by the game effect lamp 9, and the timing for switching the effects control are set. Has been. As such an effect control pattern, what corresponds to the jackpot type, the variation pattern, the notice pattern, the battle effect pattern, the promotion effect, and the relief effect may be prepared for each effect mode. For example, as an effect control pattern for a big hit, an effect control pattern for a 15-round big hit, an effect control pattern for a 2-round big hit in the normal mode, an effect control pattern for a 2-round big hit in the battle mode, and for a 2-round big hit in the chance mode Production control patterns are prepared. The effect during the big hit differs depending on the type of the big hit (number of rounds), but the effect control pattern may be set so as to differ depending on the effect mode and the variation pattern as well as the type of the big hit. . For example, an effect control mode for two rounds of big hit in a normal mode, an effect control pattern for two rounds of big hit in battle mode, and an effect control pattern for two rounds of big hit in chance mode (mode The transition effect) may be different.

  For example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 28 is provided in the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. ing. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 28 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example, a plurality of types of states whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state in the display area of the image display device 5, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers that are used to control the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 executes various kinds of effect display such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining the timing of switching effect images to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Control. The display control unit 123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes an input port for taking in various signals such as an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30, and effect control. And an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the substrate 12. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a sound effect signal transmitted to the audio control board 13, an electric decoration signal transmitted to the lamp control board 14, etc. Is output. The RTCM 126 mounted on the effect control board 12 is a device for measuring time to indicate the current “year”, “month”, “day”, “day of the week”, “hour”, “minute”, and “second”. . The effect control CPU 120 acquires date / time information from the RTCM 126 when the power is turned on for the first time (the operation start date / time of the gaming machine 1), and stores the acquired date / time information in the effect control timer setting unit 192 or the like as the operation start date / time. Thereafter, by comparing the date and time information acquired from the RTCM 126 with the stored operation start date and time, the effect control board 12 can calculate the time from the operation start date and time.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is transmitted from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process. In other words, when processing for holding the internal state at the time of power supply stop is executed at the time of power supply, the RAM 102 is set based on the held internal state, and the previous state and rendering mode are supported. To the effect control board 12. Based on the command, the effect control board 12 side restores the effect state. Since such processing is executed, it is possible to return to the state when the power supply is stopped, so that the player is not distrusted. When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 29 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to detect input from each switch 21, 22A, 22B, 23, etc. via the switch circuit 110. The state of the signal is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a main random number value update process for updating at least a part of random number values MR1, MR2, MR3, MR4, MR5, MR6 and the like used on the main substrate 11 side by software is executed ( Step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of the display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade. After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table.

  Following such command control processing, prize ball processing is executed (step S18). In the prize ball processing, one of a plurality of types of payout number designation commands is sent to the payout control board based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the like. Set to send. Thus, the number of game balls to be paid out is set according to the winning opening from which the winning of the game ball is detected. After the award ball process is executed, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 29 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S100). FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a start winning determination process.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 31, the CPU 103 first corresponds to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A among the first start opening switch 22A and the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A provided in the ON state is on (step S201). At this time, if the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step S201; Yes), the first hold storage corresponding to the number of hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A. It is determined whether or not the number is a predetermined upper limit value (eg, “4”) (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 may identify the first reserved memory number by reading the value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (first reserved memory number count value).

  If the first reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the first reserved memory number is incremented by 1, for example, by adding 1 to the first reserved memory number count value ( Step S203). Then, from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are extracted (step S204). . Numerical value data indicating each random number value extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, whereby each random number value is stored (step S205). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address (first address) of the first start opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, etc., to transmit the first starting opening winning designation command to the effect control board 12. Is set (step S206). The first start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 29 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  After executing the processing of step S206, for example, by adding 1 to the value of the total reserved memory number counter (total reserved memory number count value) provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, the total reserved memory number is set to 1. Add (step S207). Then, for example, by setting the storage address of the reserved memory count notification command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, settings for transmitting the reserved memory count notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed (step S208). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way follows the first start winning prize designation command, for example, by executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 29 after the special symbol process process ends. The signal is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  If the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is in the OFF state in step S201 (step S201; No), or if the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes) ) Or, after the processing of step S208 is executed, the detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the ON state. It is determined whether or not (step S209). At this time, if the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in an OFF state (step S209; No), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step S209; Yes), it corresponds to the number of the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not the second reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S210). At this time, the CPU 103 may specify the second reserved memory number by reading the value of the second reserved memory number counter (second reserved memory number count value) provided in the game control counter setting unit 154.

  If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value in step S210 (step S210; Yes), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the second reserved memory number is not the upper limit value (step S210; No), the second reserved memory number is incremented by 1, for example, by incrementing the second reserved memory number count value. (Step S211). Then, from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are extracted (step S212). . Numerical value data indicating each random value extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, whereby each random number value is stored (step S213). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the second start opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning designation command to the effect control board 12 is performed. (Step S214). The second start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 29 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  After executing the process of step S214, the total reserved memory number is incremented by 1 (step S215), for example, by adding 1 to the total reserved memory number count value. Then, for example, by setting the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, settings for transmitting the reserved storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 are made (step S216). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way follows the second start winning prize designation command, for example, by executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 29 after the special symbol process process ends. The signal is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12. After the start winning determination process as described above is executed, one of the processes of steps S110 to S117 shown in FIG. 30 is selected and executed according to the value of the special figure process flag.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 151A and the second special diagram reservation storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special game using the display device 4B. Further, in the special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (the jackpot symbol and the special symbol game in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B). One of the lost symbols) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process is based on the determination result of whether or not the mode flag value and the variable display result are “big hit”, the determination result of whether or not the variable display state of the decorative design is the reach mode, etc. Thus, a process for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is included.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Further, it is also determined whether or not the elapsed time thus measured has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the special figure variation time is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the change of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed. A process for setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on, and when the big hit flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. To do. When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big winning opening is a process for starting the execution of the round in the big winning gaming state and setting the opening for the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” Etc. are included. At this time, for example, an upper limit of a period during which the big prize opening is in an open state may be set corresponding to the setting of the maximum number of big prize opening times. As an example, if the maximum value of the number of times a big winning opening is opened is set to “15” corresponding to the 15th round big hit state, or “7” corresponding to the seventh round big hit state, the big winning opening is set to the open state. The upper limit of the period is set to “29 seconds”. On the other hand, if the maximum value for the number of times a big winning opening is opened is set to “2” corresponding to the two round big hit state, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”. Set to. Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The special winning opening releasing process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. This process during opening of the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the elapsed time measured, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. Processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. When returning the special winning opening to the closed state, processing for stopping the supply of the drive signal to a predetermined solenoid is executed, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”.

  The post-opening processing for the special winning opening in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The post-opening process for the big prize opening includes a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big prize opening is in an open state has reached the maximum number of open big prize openings, Includes processing to update the value of the special figure process flag to “7” when it has reached, and processing to update the value of the special figure process flag to “6” when the maximum number of times of winning the big prize opening has not been reached. ing.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. This jackpot end process corresponds to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed by the electric parts for effects such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. For example, a process for waiting until the waiting time elapses and a process for performing various settings corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 32, the CPU 103 first reads the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example, so that the second reserved memory number is “0”. Whether or not (step S231). At this time, if the second reserved memory number is other than “0” (step S231; No), as the reserved data stored in association with the reserved number “1” in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are respectively read (step S232). Subsequently, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved memory number count value, the second reserved memory number is updated so as to be decremented by 1, and the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B uses the reserved number “1”. The storage contents of the hold data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted up by one entry (step S233). Then, in response to starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” (step S234). Further, as the determination data for determining whether the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit”, the second special figure display result determination data 130B shown in FIG. 7B is selected and set. (Step S235). For example, in the process of step S235, the storage address of the second special figure display result determination data 130B in the ROM 101 may be set in a determination data pointer or the like.

  If it is determined in step S231 that the second reserved memory number is “0” (step S231; Yes), for example, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read. Thus, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is “0” (step S236). At this time, if the first reserved storage number is other than “0” (step S236; No), the reserved data stored in association with the reserved number “1” in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is stored as special data. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are respectively read (step S237). Subsequently, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved memory number count value, the first reserved memory number is updated to be decremented by 1, and the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A uses the reserved number “1”. The storage contents of the hold data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted up by one entry (step S238). Then, in response to starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, the value of the special fluctuation designation buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (the fluctuation special figure) The designated buffer value) is set to “1” (step S239). Further, the first special figure display result determination data 130A shown in FIG. 7A is selected and set as a determination table for determining whether the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit”. (Step S240). For example, in the process of step S240, the storage address (first address) of the first special figure display result determination data 130A in the ROM 101 may be set in a determination data pointer or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  After performing either of the processes of steps S235 and S240, for example, by subtracting 1 from the total pending storage count value, the total pending storage count is updated by 1 (step S241). In addition, before subtracting 1 from the total reserved memory number in step S241, the total reserved memory number count value is read out and used for later determination. Therefore, the variable start total reserved memory number buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 Store it in. In this way, in step S231, it is determined whether or not the second reserved memory number is “0”. If the second reserved memory number is “0”, the first reserved memory number is “0” in step S236. Is determined. Therefore, when the hold data is stored in the second special figure storage unit 151B, even if the hold data is stored in the first special figure storage unit 151A, the second special symbol display device 4B A second start condition for starting a special figure game using two special figures is established. That is, in this embodiment, the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B has priority over the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Executed.

  After executing the process of step S241, the CPU 103 uses the second special figure display result determination data 130B set in step S235 or the first special figure display result determination data 130A set in step S240. By referring, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination read in step S232 or step S237 matches the big hit determination value data (step S242). At this time, if the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the jackpot determination value data, it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” and the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the big hit determination value data in step S242 (step S242; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S243). ). At this time, the jackpot type determination data 131 shown in FIG. 8 is selected and set as determination data for determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S244). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type read out in step S232 or step S237, the big hit type is determined by referring to the big hit type determining data 131 set in step S244. It is determined as one of a plurality of types of “big hit”, “second big hit”, “third big hit”, and “fourth big hit” (step S245). Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step S245, the jackpot type buffer value is set to any one of “00” to “03” (step S246).

  After the process of step S246 is executed, a maximum value for the number of times of winning a prize opening is set (step S247). At this time, if the big hit type is “first big hit” or “second big hit”, the maximum value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening is set to “15” corresponding to the 15-time open game in the 15 round big hit state. When the jackpot type is “third jackpot” or “fourth jackpot”, the maximum value of the number of times of winning the big prize opening is set to “2” corresponding to the twice-open game in the two-round jackpot state.

  When the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 does not match the jackpot determination value data in step S242 (step S242; No), or after executing the processing of step S247, the variable display result is determined and the jackpot type is determined. A confirmed special symbol is set corresponding to the result (step S248). As an example, if the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 does not match the big hit determination value data in step S242, “−” is obtained as a lost symbol corresponding to the determination result that the variable display result is “lost”. The special symbol indicating the symbol “” is set as the confirmed special symbol. If the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the big hit determination value data in step S242, “1” which becomes a big hit symbol according to the big hit type determination result (big hit type buffer value) in step S245. , “3”, “5”, “7”, any one of the special symbols indicating the numbers is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, when the jackpot type buffer value is “00” (“first jackpot”), a special symbol indicating the number “7” as the first jackpot symbol is displayed, and the jackpot type buffer value is “01” (“second” "Big jackpot"), a special symbol indicating the number "3" as the second jackpot symbol, and when the big hit type buffer value is "02" ("third jackpot"), the third jackpot symbol " If the special symbol indicating the number “5” is the big hit type buffer value “03” (“fourth big hit”), the special symbol showing the number “1” as the fourth big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Set. In the example in which the big hit type buffer value is “00” when the variable display result is “losing”, the definite special symbols are “−”, “1”, “3”, “ It may be set to either “5” or “7”.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . If the first reserved storage number is “0” in step S236 (step S236; Yes), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step S250), and the special symbol normal process is terminated.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 33, the CPU 103 first reads the value of the mode flag from the game control flag setting unit 152 (step S261). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S262). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S262; Yes), the big win type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 and the battle win count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 are used. Read (step S263). Thereafter, according to the selection setting shown in FIG. 34A, based on the value of the mode flag, the big hit type buffer value, the battle win count value, etc. read in steps S261 and S263, the big hit variation pattern type determination data 133A to One of 133I is selected and set (step S264).

  If the big hit flag is off in step S262 (step S262; No), either one of the reach determination data 132A and 132B shown in FIG. 9A or 9B is set according to the value of the mode flag. (Step S265). That is, the reach determination data 132A is set when the value of the mode flag is “0” indicating “normal mode”, and the reach determination data 132B is set when the value is other than that. At this time, the total reserved memory number is specified by reading the total reserved memory number stored in the variable start total reserved memory number buffer of the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S266). Subsequently, a random value MR3 for reach determination is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S267). Then, based on the reach determination random number MR3 extracted in step S267, the presence / absence of the reach mode is determined by referring to one of the reach determination data 132A and 132B set in step S265 (step S268). ).

  If the determination result “reach is present” is obtained in step S268 (step S269; Yes), the variation pattern type determination data 134 for reach / losing is set (step S270). On the other hand, when the determination result “no reach” that does not execute the reach mode is obtained in step S268 (step S269; No), reading is performed in step S261 according to the selection setting shown in FIG. Based on the mode flag value, any one of the non-reach variation pattern type determination data 135A to 135C is selected and set (step S271). Note that when the mode is any one of “battle mode”, “chance mode”, and “super hot mode”, since it is determined only without reach based on the reach determination data 132B shown in FIG. 9B, step S262 is performed. If it is determined to be No in the battle mode chance mode or the intense hot mode (when the mode flag is other than “0”), the processing of steps S265 to S269 is skipped and the processing of step S271 is performed. You may make it transfer to. By doing so, the extraction of the reach determination random number MR3 and the reach determination process can be omitted, and the processing load and the data capacity (because the reach determination data 132B becomes unnecessary) can be reduced. it can.

  After performing any of the processes of steps S264, S270, and S271, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S272). Then, based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S272 and the total reserved memory number stored in the variation start total reserved memory number buffer of the game control buffer setting unit 155, the process proceeds to steps S264, S270, and S271. By referring to the variation pattern type determination data set in either one, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S273).

  Here, in the processing of steps S272 and S273, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A using the first special symbol on the basis that the first starting condition is satisfied. Whether to determine the type, or to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied Regardless of the production mode, regardless of the production mode, the variation pattern type is determined using the numerical data indicating the common random value MR4 used for determination of the variation pattern type updated by a common random counter or the like. Decide on one of multiple types. As an example, in the process of step S273, the variation pattern type may be determined with reference to the determination data stored in the address of the ROM 101 set in the determination data pointer.

  After determining the variation pattern type in step S273 in this way, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type, data for determining the variation pattern for jackpot as determination data for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns. One of a plurality of types of variation pattern determination data such as 136A to 136C, reach variation variation pattern determination data 137, and non-reach loss variation pattern determination data 138A to 138C is selected and set (step S274). Specifically, for example, the address of the variation pattern determination data is stored in association with the determination value of each variation pattern type determination data, and the address is set in the determination data pointer. Subsequently, a random value MR5 for determining a variation pattern is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S275). Then, based on the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern extracted in step S275, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination data set in step S274 (step S276). ).

  Here, in the processes of steps S275 and S276, the decorative symbol variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A using the first special symbol when the first start condition is satisfied. Whether or not the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied Regardless of which production mode is selected, any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns can be selected using numerical data indicating a common random number value MR5 for determining a variation pattern that is updated by a common random counter or the like. Decide on. Further, in the processing in steps S275 and S276, the variation pattern is detected by the common processing module using the numerical data indicating the common random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S268. Can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S276, the variation pattern may be determined by referring to the determination data stored in the address of the ROM 101 set in the determination data pointer.

  Following the determination of the variation pattern in step S276, a special figure variation time corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern is set (step S277). Thereafter, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the above (step S278). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  After the process of step S278 is executed, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the change of the special symbol are performed (step S279). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sequentially issues a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to transmit, setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is designated by a transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 Stored in the designated buffer area. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sequentially issues a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to transmit, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. When such setting in step S279 is performed, every time the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. The first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, and the variable display result notification command are sequentially transmitted.

  Following the setting in step S279, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S280), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 35, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S300). At this time, if the big hit flag is ON (step S300; Yes), the value of the battle victory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is updated, and a battle victory number notification command corresponding to the updated value is mainly issued. Settings for transmission from the board 11 to the effect control board 12 are performed (step S301). In the process of step S301, when the jackpot type is “first jackpot” (the jackpot type buffer value is “00”) and the first jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the battle mode, the battle win count value is incremented by one. And update. Also, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the battle victory frequency notification command table prepared in advance for transmitting the battle victory frequency notification command is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. That's fine. After executing the process of step S301, a big hit start production waiting time is set (step S302). For example, in the process of step S302, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the jackpot start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S302, setting for transmitting a big hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S303). For example, in the process of step S303, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the jackpot start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the jackpot start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Should be stored in. Thereafter, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S304). At this time, for example, by determining whether either the probability change flag or the time reduction flag is on, it is determined whether the probability change state or the time reduction state is in the normal state (step S305). .

  If it is determined in step S305 that the state is either the probability variation state or the short-time state (step S305; Yes), is the big hit type buffer value “03” corresponding to the big hit type of “fourth big hit”? It is determined whether or not (step S306). At this time, if the big hit type buffer value is “03” (step S306; Yes), the big hit type becomes “fourth big hit” when the probability variation state or the short-time state is set, and the two round big hit state is controlled. Corresponding to the normal probability state, the probability change time short / medium 2R non-probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S307). When it is determined in step S306 that the big hit type buffer value is other than “03” (step S306; No), after executing the process of step S307, the setting for ending the probability variation state or the time reduction state is set. This is performed (step S308). For example, in step S308, a process for clearing the probability change flag and the time-short flag to turn it off, a process for clearing a special-figure fluctuation counter for counting the number of executions of the special-figure game in the time-short state, and the like are executed. That's fine. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S309), and then the special symbol stop process is ended. If it is determined in step S305 that neither the probability variation state nor the time-short state is present (step S305; No), the processing in steps S306 to S308 may be skipped and the processing may proceed to step S309.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S300 (step S301; No), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S310). After executing the process of step S310, it is determined whether or not to end the time reduction state (step S311). For example, in the determination as to whether or not to end the time saving state in step S311, the value of the special figure fluctuation count counter (special figure fluctuation count count value) is updated by, for example, 1 subtraction or 1 addition, etc. It is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation frequency count value matches a predetermined time-short state end determination value (for example, “0”). At this time, if it coincides with the time-short state end determination value, the time-short state may be ended and controlled to the normal state by clearing the time-short flag and turning it off. On the other hand, if it does not coincide with the time-saving gaming state end determination value, the state of the time-saving flag may be maintained and the processing of step S311 may be ended. In the process of step S311, when the probability variation flag is on, it may be determined that the time-short state is not terminated regardless of the special figure variation count value. As a result, in the probability variation state, until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”, the probability variation control that makes the probability of controlling to the big hit gaming state higher than the normal probability state, and the time reduction control that shortens the special figure variation time Will continue.

  After executing the process of step S311, the mode switching setting is executed (step S312). In the mode flag switching setting, for example, the mode flag is switched according to the setting of the mode flag switching setting data 201 as shown in FIG. When the probability variation flag is in the off state (when it is in the short time state), the mode flag switching setting data at the timing of ending the short time state (for example, the special game is executed 30 times as the first short time upper limit number in the short time state). The mode flag may be switched to “0” according to 201. When the probability variation flag is in the on state (when it is in the probability variation state), the mode flag is set to “3” at the timing at which the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times equal to the first short time upper limit number) in the certain probability variation state. It is sufficient to switch to. Thereby, if the production mode is “chance mode”, switching to the “super hot mode” is performed. It should be noted that the timing for switching the mode flag may be varied depending on whether the state is the probability variation state or the time reduction state. As an example, when the time reduction state is set, the mode flag is switched to “0” at the timing when the time reduction state ends, while when the probability change state is set, the number of times of execution of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number. Each time the process of step S312 is executed, it may be determined whether or not to switch the mode flag to “3” using numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value or the like.

  After executing the mode flag switching setting in step S312, the value of the battle victory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is updated, and a battle victory number notification command corresponding to the updated value is produced from the main board 11. Settings for transmission to the control board 12 are performed (step S313). In the process of step S313, when the effect mode is switched to the “normal mode” (when the mode flag is switched to “0” in the process of step S312), the value of the battle victory number counter is reset to “0”. The After the process of step S313, a setting for transmitting the effect mode transition notification command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S314). For example, when the effect mode is switched in the process of step S312, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the effect mode transition notification command table prepared in advance for transmitting the corresponding effect mode transition notification command is the transmission command buffer. In the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer. Thereafter, the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 36, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S321). As an example, in the post-opening process for the big prize opening in step S116 shown in FIG. 30, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S321, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and depending on whether or not the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value. What is necessary is just to determine whether the production waiting time at the end of the big hit has elapsed. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S321 (step S321; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed in step S321 (step S321; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (step S322). Subsequently, the big hit type buffer value read in step S322 is either “01” corresponding to the big hit type of “second big hit” or “03” corresponding to the big hit type of “fourth big hit”. It is determined whether there are any other values (step S323). At this time, if the big hit type buffer value is “01” or “03” (step S323; Yes), the setting for starting the control to the time reduction state is performed. At this time, it is determined whether or not the probability change time short / medium 2R non-probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is ON (step S324). If the 2R non-probability change flag is set to OFF (step S324; No), the time reduction flag is set to the on state, and the first time limit upper limit number (for example, “30”) can be executed in the time reduction state. What is necessary is just to set to a special figure fluctuation frequency counter as an upper limit of a special figure game (step S325). On the other hand, if the probability change time medium / short 2R non-probability change flag is on (step S324; Yes), the probability change time medium / short 2R non-probability change flag is cleared and turned off (step S326). In addition, the time-short flag is set to the on state, and the second time-shortage upper limit number (for example, “100”) may be set as the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time-short state in the special figure fluctuation number counter. (Step S326). In this way, by executing the processing of steps S324 to S327, when the jackpot type is controlled to the second round jackpot state based on the fact that the jackpot type is “fourth jackpot” when in the probability variation state or the short time state, The number of second short-time upper limit times that can be executed in the short-time state is greater than the first short-time upper-limit number of times when it is controlled to the two-round big-hit state based on the fact that the big hit type is “fourth big hit” in the normal state. This is set as the upper limit value of the special figure game, and the time-shortening control is performed after the two round big hit state is completed.

  When the big hit type buffer value is other than “01” and “03” in step S323 (step S323; No), setting for starting control to the probability changing state is performed (step S328). As an example, in the process of step S328, the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag may be set to the on state.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S325, S327, and S328, the mode flag switching setting is executed (step S329). In the mode flag switching setting in step S329, for example, the mode flag is switched in accordance with the mode flag switching setting data 200 as shown in FIG. Whether the current presentation mode is a plurality of types, whether the big hit type is “first big hit” to “fourth big hit”, or when the “battle mode”, the big hit type is “third big hit” In this case, the mode flag may be switched according to the mode flag switching setting data 200 depending on whether or not the “battle mode” is a continuous variation pattern. When the big hit type is “third big hit” in the “battle mode”, the fluctuation pattern (battle loss B4-2) or the fluctuation pattern (battle) falling from the battle mode continues. It may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 as to whether it was a loss B4-1) so that it can be determined by the process of step S329.

  After the mode switching setting is executed in step S329, a setting for transmitting a jackpot end designation command and a presentation mode transition notification command from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12 is performed (step S330). For example, in the process of step S330, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the jackpot end designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the jackpot end designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Should be stored in. When the mode is switched in the process of step S329, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the effect mode transition notification command table prepared in advance for transmitting the corresponding effect mode transition notification command is stored in the transmission command buffer. What is necessary is just to store in the buffer area | region designated with the transmission command pointer. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S331), and then the big hit end process is ended.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process executed in step S16 of FIG. In this normal symbol process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 provided in the passage gate 41 is in an on state, so that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. It is determined whether or not (step S131). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is turned on (step S131; Yes), the process at the time of passing the gate is executed (step S132). On the other hand, when the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is in the off state (step S131; No), the process of step S132 is skipped.

  As an example of the process at the time of passing through the gate executed in step S132, the following process is executed. That is, first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved maps stored, which is the number of reserved data stored in the reserved map storage unit 151C, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). At this time, if the number of stored customary drawings is an upper limit value, the current game ball detection is invalidated and the process at the time of passing the gate is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the number of stored ordinary maps is less than the upper limit value, for example, the CPU 103 indicates a random number value MR6 for determining a displayed diagram result from numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter. Extract numerical data. Then, the numerical data indicating the extracted random number MR6 is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the general-purpose reserved storage unit 151C. After the above-described processing at the time of passing the gate, or after it is determined in step S131 that the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is in the OFF state, depending on the value of the usual process flag, the following is performed. Each process of steps S140 to S144 is executed.

  The normal symbol normal process in step S140 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In the normal symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display device 20 starts the normal symbol game based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the general symbol hold storage unit 151C. At this time, for example, in the case where there is pending data stored in the ordinary figure storage unit 151C, the value of the ordinary figure process flag is updated to “1”.

  The normal symbol determination process in step S141 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. In this normal symbol determination process, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR6 for determining the normal display result, the variable symbol display of the normal symbol in the normal game is made with reference to the general symbol display result determination data 139 shown in FIG. A determination is made as to whether or not the result of the general map display is “per standard map” or “missing the general map”. Here, in the general-purpose map display result determination data 139, when the time-short flag is on, the rate of determination of “per-normal” is higher than when the time-short flag is off. A numerical value MR6 is assigned to the judgment value data per ordinary figure. As a result, in the probability variation state and the short time state, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary game is more likely to be “per ordinary figure” than in the normal state, so that the second start winning prize formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is formed. The mouth is likely to be in an enlarged open state, and the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening (start winning prize). Further, in the normal symbol determination process, the universal symbol change time corresponding to the universal symbol display result is also determined. Here, in the general-purpose map display result determination data 139, when the time-short flag is on, the normal time fluctuation time is set to be shorter than when the time-short flag is off. This reduces the interval for deriving and displaying the normal symbol variable display result in the normal game in the probability variation state and the short time state. The second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is likely to be in an expanded and open state, and the game ball can easily enter (start winning) the second start winning opening. Further, in the normal symbol determination process, when the random number MR6 matches the determination value data for the normal symbol and the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per normal symbol”, the second start winning opening is set to the expanded open state. You may set the tilt control time which is time. Here, in the normal map display result determination data 139, when the hour / hour flag is on, the tilt control time is set longer than when the hour / hour flag is off. As a result, in the probability change state or the short time state, the time for the second start winning opening to be in the expanded open state becomes longer, so that the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening (start winning prize). Alternatively, when the time reduction flag is on, by setting so that the number of times of tilt control is increased when the variable display result is “per normal” than when the time reduction flag is off, In the probability variation state or the short time state, the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is likely to be in an expanded and open state, and the game ball may easily enter the second starting winning opening (start winning prize). The setting related to the tilt control may be performed in the normal symbol stop process in step S143 or the normal electric accessory operation process in step S144.

  The normal symbol variation process in step S142 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. In this normal symbol variation process, a setting for varying the normal symbol is performed in the general symbol game by the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol that changes based on these settings is displayed as a normal symbol display result that is a variable symbol display result of the normal symbol when the normal symbol stop process in step S143 is executed. In the normal symbol variation process, the elapsed time from the start of variation of the normal symbol is measured. At this time, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the normal time fluctuation time. Then, when the usual figure change time is reached, the value of the usual figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The normal symbol stop process in step S143 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “3”. In this normal symbol stop process, the normal symbol display 20 is set to stop and display the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol. Note that the setting for stopping and displaying the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is the normal symbol process flag value when the measured elapsed time reaches the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol variation process of step S142. It may be performed before updating to “3”. Further, in the normal symbol stop process, when the normal symbol display result is “per normal symbol”, for example, for driving the solenoid for the ordinary electric accessory connected to the movable wing piece provided in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B, for example. After the setting for tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted, such as the setting of the normal operation pattern, the value of the normal process flag is updated to “4”. If the normal map display result is “general map loss”, the value of the general map process flag is updated to “0”.

  The ordinary electric accessory actuating process of step S144 is executed when the value of the normal process flag is “4”. In this ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the movable wing piece provided in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B is moved from the vertical position to the tilt position in response to the variable display result in the ordinary game being “per game”. Thus, the tilt control setting for changing the second start winning opening from the normal open state to the expanded open state is performed. For example, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, a drive control signal for driving the ordinary electric accessory solenoid is generated according to the setting of the ordinary electric action pattern set in the ordinary symbol stop process in step S143. You can make it. Further, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the elapsed time after the ordinary electric accessory solenoid is driven and the second start winning opening is set in the open state is measured, and the elapsed time is tilted corresponding to the ordinary electric action pattern. A determination is made whether the control time has been reached. When the elapsed time reaches the tilt control time, the drive of the ordinary electric utility solenoid is stopped and the movable wing piece is returned from the tilt position to the vertical position, so that the second start winning opening is in an expanded open state. Set to change from normal to open state. At this time, the value of the normal process flag may be updated to “0”.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 39 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S 401), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). When power is turned on for the first time, the effect control CPU 120 acquires date / time information from the RTCM 126 and stores it in the effect control timer setting unit 192.

  Thereafter, a random number update process is executed (step S402), and numerical data indicating a random value counted by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 among various random values used for effect control is displayed by software. Update. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S403). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 195. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is off in step S403 (step S403; No), the process returns to step S402. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on in step S403 (step S403; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S404), and command analysis processing is executed (step S405). . In the command analysis process executed in step S405, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S405, an effect control process is executed (step S406). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a lighting operation in the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are performed. The contents of the control of the effect operation using the are determined, determined, set according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  In the command analysis process of step S405, for example, a pending storage increase display process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 40 is executed. In the reserved memory increase display process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the reserved memory count notification command transmitted from the main board 11 by, for example, checking the effect control command stored in the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is reception (step S151). At this time, if no pending storage number notification command is received (step S151; No), the pending storage increase display process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S151 that the pending storage number notification command has been received (step S151; Yes), one of the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command is selected. It is determined whether the designated command has been received (step S152). Here, it is determined whether or not the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command has been received in the command analysis processing in step S405, and any of the start opening prize designation commands is received. When it is determined that there is a command, a command reception flag corresponding to the received start opening winning designation command may be set to an on state. As an example, when the first start opening prize designation command is received, the first start opening prize designation command reception flag is set to ON, while when the second start opening prize designation command is received, the second start opening prize designation command is set. Sets the specified command reception flag to the on state. In step S152, if either the first start opening prize designation command reception flag or the second start opening prize designation command reception flag is on, it may be determined that the start opening prize designation command has been received.

  If it is determined in step S152 that the start opening winning designation command has been received (step S152; Yes), for example, depending on whether or not the first starting opening winning designation command receiving flag is on, etc. It is determined whether or not the received start opening winning designation command is the first starting opening winning designation command (step S153). At this time, if it is determined that the command is the first start opening winning designation command (step S153; Yes), the reserved storage display in the start winning storage display area 5H is updated corresponding to the increase in the first reserved storage number. Therefore, the first hold display increase update setting is performed (step S154). In this first hold display increase update setting, for example, the first start by the game ball having entered one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H into the first start winning opening. Display setting for changing to blue display is performed according to the establishment of the condition. After performing such first hold display increase update setting, the hold storage increase display process ends.

  When it is determined in step S153 that the command is the second start opening prize designation command (step S153; No), the reserved memory display in the start prize memory display area 5H corresponding to the increase in the second reserved memory number. 2nd hold display increase update setting for updating is performed (step S155). In the second hold display increase / update setting, for example, one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H is used for the second start due to the game ball entering the second start winning opening. Display setting for changing to red display is performed according to the establishment of the condition. After performing such second hold display increase update setting, the hold storage increase display process ends.

  If it is determined in step S152 that the start opening prize designation command has not been received (step S152; No), the hold storage display in the start prize storage display area 5H is displayed correspondingly when there is no start opening prize designation. Display update setting is performed when no start opening winning designation is specified for updating (step S156). In this display update setting when the start opening prize is not specified, for example, a display setting for changing all of the display parts that are displayed in blue or red in the start prize storage display area 5H to gray display, and a start prize storage display. Display setting for changing one of the display parts that are not displayed in the area 5H to gray display is performed. After performing such a display update setting when no start opening prize designation is made, the on-hold storage increase display process is terminated.

  As described above, when the first hold display increase update setting is performed in step S154 and the second hold display increase update setting is performed in step S155, the hold memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. If either of the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command as the starting opening winning designation command has been normally received, for example, as shown in FIG. In the display area 5H, a first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A based on establishment of the first start condition and a second special figure reservation based on establishment of the second start condition The second reserved memory number, which is the number of stored pending data in the storage unit 151B, can be displayed in an identifiable manner.

  On the other hand, in step S156, when the start opening prize designation is not specified, the display update setting is performed, so that when the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, the first starting opening prize that becomes the start opening prize designation command is received. Based on the determination that neither the designation command nor the second start opening prize designation command has been received, the display mode of the hold storage display in the start prize storage display area 5H is changed to a predetermined display mode, for example, By displaying in gray as shown in FIG. 41 (B), the total reserved memory number can be specified, but the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number can be displayed so that they cannot be specified. After that, if the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, if the start opening winning designation command is normally received, one of the processes of steps S154 and S155 is executed. A new display corresponding to the received start opening winning designation command can be added while maintaining the display mode in the gray display area. As an example, when the hold memory display as shown in FIG. 41B is being performed, if the hold memory number notification command is received after the first start opening winning designation command is normally received, By performing the first hold display increase update setting in S154, as shown in FIG. 41 (C), a blue display corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening is added.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S406 of FIG. In this effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the following processes in steps S160 to S165, for example, according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Run.

  The fluctuation start command reception waiting process in step S160 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In this variation start command reception waiting process, the image display device 5 is changed depending on whether one of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is received as the variation start command transmitted from the main board 11. And a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area. ing. Also included is a process of displaying a demo screen on the image display device 5 when no change start command is received. If it is determined that variable display is to be started, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to “1”.

  The decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this decorative symbol variation setting process, the start of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the start of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In response to the above, in order to perform various presentation operations including variable display of decorative symbols and display of numbers in the change start hold number display area 5A, And a process for determining an established decorative pattern, a notice pattern, and the like and setting an effect control pattern based on the determination result. After such determination and setting are performed, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The decorative symbol variation process in step S162 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the decorative symbol variation process, various effect control data are read from the effect control pattern in correspondence with the value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 (effect control process timer value) Processing for performing various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols is included. After starting the production control, for example, it corresponds to the fact that the end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative design is read from the production control pattern, or that the decorative design stop command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Then, the finalized decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. At this time, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The decorative symbol variation end process in step S163 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. This decoration symbol variation end process includes a process of determining whether or not the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. At this time, if it is determined that the jackpot start designation command has been received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”. When a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the big hit start designation command, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the variable display result being “losing”.

  The big hit control effect process in step S164 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the effect processing during the big hit control, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” or the like is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The sound effect sound signal is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the sound effect signal to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are turned on by outputting the electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 14. This includes processing for controlling various performance operations in the big hit gaming state such as turning off / off / flashing. In addition, when a variation pattern command for executing a promotion effect during a big hit is received, an effect control pattern for executing the promotion effect is set, and a promotion effect for notifying that a promiscuous state is reached after the jackpot gaming state is finished. The process to be executed is included. As for the promotion effect, in addition to notifying that it will be in a promising state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, for example, after once informing that the number of round games executed in the jackpot gaming state (round number) is 7 rounds , And the like for notifying that it is 15 rounds may be included. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” in response to, for example, receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process in step S165 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending effect process, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 or a voice control board For example, sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting sound effect signals to 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and decoration LEDs are turned on / off / flashing by outputting electric decoration signals to the lamp control board 14. A process for controlling various performance operations corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state is included. Further, the ending effect process includes a process that the mode transition effect is executed in accordance with the effect mode shift notification command transmitted from the main board 11. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the end of the effect operation.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation start command reception waiting process executed in step S160 of FIG. In this variation start command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether either the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received as the variation start command transmitted from the main board 11. Determination is made (step S451). When the variation start command is received (step S451; Yes), the demonstration screen is set to end (step S459), and the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the decorative symbol variation setting process. Then (step S460), the variation start command reception waiting process is terminated.

  If the change start command has not been received (step S451; No), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the demonstration screen is being displayed, for example, by checking a demonstration display flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Is determined (step S452). If the demonstration screen is being displayed (step S452; Yes), the variation start command reception waiting process is terminated. If the demonstration screen is not being displayed (step S452; No), the production control CPU 120 obtains information on the operation start date and time from the production control timer setting unit 192 and the like, and obtains current date and time information from the RTCM 126 (step S453). ). And an operation period is calculated from the acquired date information (step S454). Subsequently, it is determined whether the calculated operation period is a predetermined value (for example, 10 days or more) (step S455). If the operation period is equal to or longer than the predetermined value (step S455; Yes), a screen including information on the reach mode is determined as a demonstration screen to be displayed on the image display device 5 (step S456). On the other hand, if the operation period is less than the predetermined value (step S455; No), the normal demonstration screen is determined (step S457). When the process of step S456 or step S457 is finished, the effect control CPU 120 executes setting for starting display of the determined demonstration screen (step S458), and ends the variation start command reception waiting process.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation setting process executed in step S161 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display result is “losing” by, for example, reading the EXT data of the variable display result notification command (step S501). . At this time, if the variable display result is “losing” (step S501; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data of the variation pattern designation command, the designated variation pattern sets the variable display mode of the decorative symbol to “non-reach”. It is determined whether or not it is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case of "" (step S502).

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S502; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S503). As an example, in the process of step S503, first, final stop symbol determination data 160A shown in FIG. 21A is selected and set. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the decorative symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination data 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination data 160B shown in FIG. 21B is selected and set. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-2, the decorative symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination data 160B. At this time, based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, by referring to the left / right output determination data 161 as shown in FIG. 22, the left / right output type DC1-1 It is determined which of a plurality of types. Thereafter, the final stop symbol determination data 160C shown in FIG. 21C is selected and set. Subsequently, a random value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the extracted random number SR1-3 and the left and right outcome type DC1-1, the final stop symbol determination data 160C is referred to determine the decorative symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3. In the case of a non-reach variation pattern in which the main designated effect is executed, the final stop symbol may be the development chance or pseudo continuous chance according to the variation pattern.

  In this way, in the process of step S503, the decorative symbols to be the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3 are determined with reference to the final stop symbol determination data 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination data 161. By doing so, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols does not become a reach combination or a jackpot combination.

  When it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S502; No), a reach symbol determination process is performed to determine a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that becomes a final stop symbol constituting a reach combination. (Step S504). FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the reach symbol determination process executed in step S504. In this reach symbol determination process, first, the total reserved memory number specified by the reserved memory number notification command is checked, and the reach symbol determination according to the total reserved memory number from the reach symbol determination data 162A to 162H shown in FIG. Data is selected and set (step S531). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a reach symbol determination random value SR2 is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S532). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR2 extracted in step S532, the reach symbol is determined as one of “1” to “8” by referring to the reach symbol determination data set in step S531. (Step S533). Thereafter, a final stop symbol of a middle symbol different from the reach symbol determined in step S593 is determined (step S534), and the reach symbol determination process is terminated. In the process of step S534, for example, a random value is extracted and a difference value is determined based on the random number value, and a middle symbol corresponding to the difference value from the reach symbol is determined as a final stop symbol, or a reach symbol is supported. A table may be prepared, and the final stop symbol may be determined based on the random number value and the table.

  If the variable display result is other than “losing” in step S501 (step S501; No), is the variable display result “big hit” and the big hit type is “first big hit” or “second big hit”? It is determined whether or not (step S505). At this time, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “first big hit” or “second big hit” (step S505; Yes), the final decoration that becomes the final stop symbol constituting the big hit combination A combination of symbols is determined (step S506). Here, the jackpot combination constituted by any of the decorative symbols having the symbol numbers “1” to “8” may be determined. As an example, in the process of step S506, when the jackpot type is “first jackpot”, it is determined whether or not to execute a promotion effect informing that the jackpot gaming state is in a promiscuous state. This determination may be performed corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command from the main board 11 or based on numerical data indicating a random value extracted on the side of the effect control board 12. May be. When it is determined not to execute the promotion effect in the big hit gaming state, the first big hit symbol determining data 163A shown in FIG. 24A is selected and set as usage data. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the first big hit symbol determination data 163A based on the extracted numerical data indicating the random value SR1-1, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas from among the probable variation symbols By determining the fixed decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed together at 5L, 5C, and 5R, the fixed decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination is determined. Further, when the jackpot type is “second jackpot”, or when it is determined that the promotion effect is executed in the jackpot game state with the jackpot type being “first jackpot”, the first jackpot shown in FIG. The second big hit symbol determination data 163B is selected and set as use data. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, with reference to the first and second big hit symbol determination data 163B, decorations of “left”, “middle”, and “right” from among the normal symbols By determining the fixed decorative symbols that are to be stopped and displayed together in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the fixed decorative symbol that is normally a jackpot combination is determined.

  When the big hit type is neither “first big hit” nor “second big hit”, that is, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “third big hit” or “fourth big hit” ( Step S505; No), the third and fourth big hit symbol determination data 163C shown in FIG. 24C is set (step S507). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S508). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value SR1-1 extracted in step S508, the third and fourth big hit symbol determination data 163C set in step S507 is referred to, and the final combination constituting the two round big hit combination A combination of fixed decorative symbols that are to be stopped symbols is determined (step S509).

  After performing any of the processes of steps S503, S504, S506, and S509, an effect control pattern determination process is performed (step S510). FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control pattern determination process executed in step S510. In this effect control pattern determination process, first, for example, by reading the EXT data of the variation pattern designation command, it is determined whether or not the designated variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the “battle mode” (step S521). ). When the variation pattern corresponds to the “battle mode” (step S521; Yes), a notice effect setting process is executed (step S522).

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the notice effect setting process executed in step S522. In this notice effect setting process, first, from the pre-battle notice selection data 170 shown in FIG. 25A, variable display results, jackpot type, first start opening prize designation command reception flag, second start opening prize designation command reception. The flag is checked and the corresponding selection data is set (step S591). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR3 for the pre-battle notice determination is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S592). Then, referring to the pre-battle notice selection data 170 set in step S591, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR3 extracted in step S592, there is no notice or the notice patterns of notice A to notice C. (Step S593). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is “losing” (step S594). When the variable display result is not “losing” (step S594; No), the selection data corresponding to the big hit type is set from the post-battle notice selection data 171 shown in FIG. 25B (step S595). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR4 for the notice determination after the battle is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S596). Then, referring to the post-battle notice selection data 171 set in step S595 based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR4 extracted in step S596, the notice of the notice D1, notice D2, notice E1, notice E2 One of the patterns is determined (step S597). If the variable display result is “lost” (step S594; Yes), the processing of steps S595 to S597 is skipped. Thereafter, the notice effect setting process ends.

  After executing the above notice effect setting process in step S522 shown in FIG. 46, a battle effect setting process for determining the effect control pattern corresponding to the “battle mode” to one of a plurality of types is executed ( Step S523). At this time, the production control CPU 120 corresponds to, for example, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the notice pattern determined in steps S593 and S597 shown in FIG. 47, and the number of battle wins shown in FIG. One of the effect control patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of “battle modes” stored in the effect control pattern table 180 is determined as a use pattern. FIG. 48A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the battle effect setting process executed in step S523.

  In the battle effect setting process shown in FIG. 48 (A), the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the battle victory count from the battle victory count notification command transmitted from the main board 11 (step S581). Subsequently, a setting for displaying the battle victory count specified in the process of step S581 in the battle victory count display area 5W of the image display device 5 is performed (step S582). Following the process of step S583, the type of enemy character and background used during the “battle mode” is determined based on the number of battle wins (step S583). In step S583, the type and background of the enemy character may be determined according to the settings as shown in FIG. In the setting shown in FIG. 48B, an example in which the number of battle wins is “0” to “8” has been shown. However, enemy characters and backgrounds when the number of battle wins is “9” or more are further displayed. It may be prepared, and if it is “9” or more, it may return to the first enemy character or the background. When the process of step S583 is completed, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is specified (step S584). Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect control pattern corresponding to the enemy character determined in step S583, the background, the variation pattern specified in step S584, and the notice pattern determined in steps S593 and S597 shown in FIG. Determination is made (step S585). Thereafter, the battle effect setting process ends.

  If the variation pattern is not a variation pattern corresponding to the “battle mode” in step S521 shown in FIG. 46 (step S521; No), it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the “chance mode” (step S521; Step S524). If the variation pattern corresponds to the “chance mode” (step S524; Yes), the effect control pattern corresponding to the “chance mode” is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S525). If the variation pattern does not correspond to the “chance mode” (step S524; No), it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the “super hot mode” (step S526). When the variation pattern corresponds to the “super hot mode” (step S526; Yes), the effect control pattern corresponding to the “super hot mode” is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S527). If the variation pattern does not correspond to the “super hot mode” (step S526; No), the effect control pattern corresponding to the “normal mode” is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S528). When the effect control pattern corresponding to the “normal mode” is determined, the battle victory number counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is reset. In this way, when the production control pattern corresponding to the “normal mode” is determined, the battle win count until the fall from the “battle mode” to the “normal mode” can be obtained by resetting the battle win counter. It can be counted continuously. After finishing any one of steps S523, S525, S527, and S528, the effect control pattern determination process is finished. In this embodiment, the notice effect setting process in step S522 is executed only in the “battle mode” to determine the presence or absence of the notice and the notice pattern, and the notice effect is executed only in the “battle mode”. However, the notice effect may be executed in the “normal mode”, “chance mode”, and “super hot mode”. In this case, the process for determining the presence / absence of a notice and the notice pattern may be executed even in the “normal mode”, “chance mode”, and “super hot mode”.

  When the effect control pattern determination process is completed in step S510 shown in FIG. 41, for example, in correspondence with the effect control process timer setting value shown in the effect control pattern determined in steps S523, S525, S527, S528, etc. of FIG. The initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set (step S511). Then, for example, by supplying a display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the effect control pattern to the display control unit 123, “left”, “middle”, and the like provided in the display area of the image display device 5 In the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of the decorative symbols is started, and the number indicating the total number of reserved memories at the start of the variation is displayed in the variation starting reserved number display area 5A. Setting for starting the variation of various symbols in the image display device 5 is performed (step S512). The total number of reserved memories at the start of fluctuation may be specified from the number of stored memories notification command and the number displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation process (step S513), and the decorative symbol variation setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation process executed in step S162 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 120 is an effect control pattern that first executes an effect (special effect) for changing the effect mode in response to the operation of the operation button 30 by variable display of the decorative symbol. It is determined whether or not (step S541). For example, it is determined based on whether or not the effect control pattern is to execute a special effect with a variable display that is a big hit in the “battle mode”. If the effect control pattern is to execute the special effect (step S541; Yes), the player can operate the operation button 30 by checking the effect control process timer value provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. Correspondingly, it is determined whether or not it is a button effective period that is a period during which the effects can be switched (step S542). For example, from the time when the effect image that prompts the operation of the operation button 30 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in a predetermined period (for example, two or more decorative symbol display areas 5M). The period of time) is the button valid period. Note that the display control process timer determination value used when determining whether or not the button is valid is different for each variation pattern (effect control pattern). Further, the button valid period may be started after the reach is established. In that case, after the reach is established, an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation button 30 (an effect for selecting the battle effect or an effect corresponding to the button operation during the battle effect) is executed, and the button effective period is determined after the reach is established. What is necessary is just a period.

  If it is within the button effective period in step S542 (step S542; Yes), it is determined whether or not the operation button 30 has been operated by the player (step S543). Specifically, based on an operation detection signal transmitted to the effect control board 12 in accordance with the operation of the operation button 30 by the player, operations predetermined for each effect control pattern (press, repetitive hit, jog operation) Etc.) is determined. If it is determined in step S541 that the effect control pattern does not execute the special effect (step S541; No), if it is determined in step S542 that it is not within the button valid period (step S542; No), or step If it is determined in S543 that the player has not operated the operation button 30 (Step S543; No), the effect control process timer value is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 (Step S544). At this time, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the timer determination values by comparing the updated effect control process timer value with various timer determination values indicated by the effect control pattern (step S545). ). And if it does not correspond to any timer judgment value (step S545; No), the decorative symbol variation process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S543 that the player has operated the operation button 30 (step S543; Yes), the effect control pattern corresponding to the operation of the operation button 30 is switched (step S546). For example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the operation of the operation button 30 is associated with an effect control pattern for executing a special effect, and the effect control pattern is switched to the associated effect control pattern. If it matches the timer determination value in step S545 (step S545; Yes), various control data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, end) stored in the effect control pattern in association with the timer determination value. Any one of the codes) is read (step S547). Further, after the effect control pattern is switched in step S546, various control data stored in the effect control pattern is read (step S547). Here, when the plurality of timer determination values indicated by the effect control pattern match the effect control process timer value in the process of step S545, the plurality of stored timer determination values are associated with each other. What is necessary is just to read control data by the process of step S547. Then, it is determined whether or not the control data read in step S547 is an end code (step S548). At this time, if it is determined that it is not an end code (step S548; No), after performing an effect control command process for performing a command or setting according to the control data read in step S547. (Step S549), the decorative symbol variation process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S548 that it is an end code (step S548; Yes), for example, by setting a predetermined timer initial value in the production control process timer, the big hit start designation command reception waiting time is set. This is performed (step S550). Then, the value of the decorative symbol process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the processing at the end of decorative symbol variation (step S551), and then the decorative symbol variation processing is terminated.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control command process executed in step S549 of FIG. In this effect control command process, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the type of control data read out in the process of step S547 shown in FIG. 49 from display control data, audio control data, and lamp control data. (Step S561). Then, it is determined whether or not the type of the control data specified in step S561 is display control data (step S562).

  If it is determined in step S562 that the data is display control data (step S562; Yes), a display control command created according to the read display control data is transmitted to the display control unit 123 (step S563). If it is determined in step S562 that the data is not display control data (step S562; No), or after the process of step S563 is executed, is the type of control data specified in step S561 a voice control data? It is determined whether or not (step S564). At this time, if the type of the control data is voice control data (step S564; Yes), the voice data created according to the read voice control data is transmitted from the output port included in the I / O 124 to the voice control board 13. By doing so (step S565), the sound corresponding to the sound control data read from the effect control pattern is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. When it is determined in step S564 that the data is not voice control data (step S564; No), or after the processing in step S565 is executed, the type of control data specified in step S561 is lamp control data. It is determined whether or not (step S566). At this time, if the type of the control data is lamp control data (step S566; Yes), the lamp data created according to the read lamp control data is transmitted to the lamp control board 14 from the output port included in the I / O 125. By doing so (step S567), the lighting operation of the game effect lamp 9 corresponding to the lamp control data read from the effect control pattern is performed. If it is determined in step S566 that the data is not voice control data (step S566; No), or after the process of step S567 is executed, the effect control command process is terminated.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an example of a reach effect in each reach mode. FIG. 51A shows that the variation of the decorative symbols has started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5. Is shown. After that, as shown in FIG. 51B, the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L.

  Here, when the reach mode is reach A, as shown in FIG. 51 (C1), the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. As shown in (C2), the decorative symbols continue to fluctuate in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5R. Thus, reach A is a normal reach without a reach effect.

  When the reach mode is reach B, as shown in FIG. 51 (D1), the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. The character “super reach” is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C. Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (D2), the decorative symbols continue to fluctuate in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5R. Thus, reach B is super reach 1 with reach production as shown in FIG. 51 (D1).

  When the reach mode is reach C, as shown in FIG. 51 (E1), the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. As shown in FIG. 6, the variation continues in a manner in which the decorative symbols are different in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5R. Thus, reach C is super reach 2 with reach production as shown in FIG. 51 (E2).

  When the reach mode is reach D, as shown in FIG. 51 (F1), the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, and FIG. 51 (F2) is displayed. As shown in the figure, the character image and the reach character are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the variation of the decorative pattern is reduced and continued. Thus, the reach D is the super reach 3 with the reach effect as shown in FIG. 51 (F2).

  After (C2), (D2), (E2), and (F2) in FIG. 51, a big hit symbol or a lost symbol is displayed depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “lost”. Become.

  Next, the main designated effect in the case where the decorative display variable display mode is “non-reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “losing” will be described. FIG. 52 shows a case where the main designated effect is not executed among the cases where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”, or the “slide” main designated effect is executed. When the effect is executed, an example of the display operation in the case where the main designated effect of “end of development chance eyes” is executed is shown. In FIG. 52 (A), for example, the decorative symbols are displayed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” in response to the start of variation of special symbols in the special symbol game. The fluctuation starts. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 52B, the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. For example, when a variation pattern of non-reach A1 or non-reach 2 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the main designated effect as shown in FIGS. 52 (C1) and (C2) is not executed, and non-reach 3 or non-reach. When the variation pattern of reach 4 is designated, the main designation effect of “slip” as shown in FIGS. 52 (E1) to (E4) or the “pseudo-continuous” as shown in FIGS. 52 (D1) to (D6). This is a case where any one of the main designated effects and the main designated effects of “end of development chance eyes” as shown in FIGS. 52 (F1) to (F6) is executed. In this embodiment, there are two types of variation patterns for executing the main designated effect in a non-reach manner, but it is also possible to prepare variation patterns for executing all these main designated effects. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines a part of the determination of which main designated effect is executed (for example, “slip” or “end development opportunity end”) on the effect control board 12 side. You may make it do.

  Next, the main designated effect in the case where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach”, or the variable display result is “big hit” will be described. FIG. 53 shows a case where the main designated effect of “pseudo-run” is executed when the variable display mode of the decorative design is “reach” or the variable display result is “big hit”. When the designated effect is executed, an example of a display operation in the case where the main designated effect of “the development opportunity” is executed is shown. In FIG. 53 (A), for example, in response to the start of variation of special symbols in a special symbol game, the decorative symbols are displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The fluctuation starts. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 53B, the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. For example, a change pattern for executing a main designation effect when the variable display result of reach A2 or reach A3 is “big hit”, or a main designation when the variable display mode of reach lose A2 or reach lose A3 is “reach” When a variation pattern for executing an effect is specified, a “slip” main specified effect as shown in FIGS. 53 (C1) to (C3), or a “pseudo-continuous” as shown in FIGS. 53 (D1) to (D5). This is a case where any one of the main designated effects and the main designated effects of “Development Chance” as shown in FIGS. 53 (E1) to (E6) are executed. 53 (C3), (D5), and (E6), after reaching the reach mode, depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “lost”, the big hit combination or the lost combination is stopped and displayed. Will be.

  In this embodiment, the iron plate reach may be obtained depending on the design when reaching the reach mode. FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of the iron plate reach that is determined to be “big hit” based on the reach design. As shown in FIG. 54 (A), the decorative symbols fluctuate in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 54 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. As shown in FIG. 54 (C), “right The decorative symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5R. At this time, as indicated by the change start hold number display area 5A, the total hold storage number at the start of change is “7”. In this case, as shown in the reach symbol determination data 162G for determining the reach symbol at the time of reach loss in FIG. 23, when the total number of reserved memories is 7, no determination value is assigned to the reach symbol “7”. . That is, when the total number of reserved memories is “7” and the reach symbol is “7”, the reach is an iron plate reach, and at this time, it is determined to be a “big hit”. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (D), the decorative symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C, resulting in “big hit”.

  Thus, after the big hit gaming state such as the 15 round big hit state or the 2 round big hit state is completed based on the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol being “big hit”, either the probability changing state or the short time state is set. Be controlled. Further, when the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the processing of step S308 shown in FIG. 35 is executed and the time reduction flag is cleared. On the other hand, even during the period from the start of the big hit gaming state to the end, the normal symbol process in step S16 shown in FIG. 29 is executed, so that the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 is used. A regular game is executed. And since the time-short flag is cleared when it is a big hit game state, the variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal game is determined by the same setting as the normal state, The second start winning opening is controlled to be in the expanded open state until the tilt control time TK1 elapses due to the setting of the normal display result determination data 139 shown in FIG. For this reason, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (A), at the timing Ti1 immediately before the timing Ti2 at which the big hit gaming state ends, the variation of the normal symbol in the normal game starts as shown in FIG. 55 (B). If it is, the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening corresponding to the probability change state or the short time state after the change of the normal symbol in the normal game ends. In this way, even in the probability variation state or the short time state, immediately after the end of the big hit gaming state, it is not possible to shift to a state in which a game ball can easily enter the second starting prize opening. There is a possibility that the ball is obtained by frequent entry of the ball, or that the special figure game according to the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game according to the first special figure and is determined to be the 15 round big hit state There is a possibility that the player cannot sufficiently obtain the profit obtained in the probabilistic state or the short time state such as increasing.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, for example, according to the normal map display result determination data 139, the normal time fluctuation times TH1 and TH2 corresponding to the time flag being OFF are set to “battle” as shown in FIG. During special mode, the special special figure game time of the special special figure game corresponding to the case where the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” during “mode”, and during the “chance mode” or “extremely hot mode” Is set to be shorter than the special figure fluctuation times T9 and T10 in the special figure game according to the first special figure corresponding to the case where the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1". Therefore, the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” when “battle mode”, “chance mode”, or “extremely hot mode” is entered in response to the probable change state or the short time state after the big hit gaming state ends. Corresponding to the special symbol change time in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A, the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 in the normal state other than the probability variation state or the short time state is used. Set a longer time than the normal time fluctuation in the normal game.

  As a result, immediately after the end of the big hit gaming state, which is in the probabilistic state or the short-running state, before the special figure game according to the first special figure is finished once, the normal symbol based on the normal symbol started in the big hit gaming state is reached. It is possible to start the regular game based on the fact that the time-short flag is on in response to the probability change state or the time-short state, and the game ball enters the second start winning opening. It is possible to shift to an easy state. Then, when a game ball enters the second start winning opening, it is determined in step S231 shown in FIG. 32 that the second reserved memory number is other than “0”. The special game according to the second special figure is executed with priority over the graphic game. Therefore, when the probability change state or the short time state is reached after the big hit gaming state is finished, as shown in FIG. 55 (C), for example, if the special figure game according to the first special figure is executed once, FIG. 55 (D). As shown below, the possibility that the special figure game according to the second special figure will be preferentially executed increases, and the benefit of the game ball easily entering the second starting prize opening in the probability variation state or the short time state is obtained. The player can get enough.

  In addition, by setting the variation pattern type determination data 138B for non-reach loss shown in FIG. 17B, the variation special figure designation buffer value corresponds to “1” during the “battle mode” in the probability variation state or the short time state. Then, the special symbol change times T5 and T6 in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A are displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the variable special symbol designation buffer value "2". The time is set longer than the special figure fluctuation times T7 and T8 in the special figure game using the second special figure in the device 4B. In addition, according to the setting of the non-reach losing variation pattern type determination data 138C shown in FIG. 17C, the variation special-spec designation buffer during the “chance mode” or “extremely hot mode” when the probability variation state or the short-time state is established. Corresponding to the value “1”, the special figure change times T9 and T10 in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A are set to “2”. The time is set to be longer than the special figure change times T11 and T12 in the special figure game using the second special figure in the corresponding second special symbol display device 4B.

  As a result, immediately after the end of the jackpot gaming state that has become a probable change state or a short-running state, the special game with the normal symbol started during the jackpot gaming state before the special chart game according to the first special chart is not executed many times. It is possible to start a normal game based on the fact that the time flag is on in response to a probability change state or a time-short state, and shift to a state in which a game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening it can. Then, when a game ball enters the second start winning opening, it is determined in step S231 shown in FIG. 32 that the second reserved memory number is other than “0”. The special game according to the second special figure is executed with priority over the graphic game. Therefore, when the probable change state or short time state is reached after the big hit game state is completed, the special figure game according to the second special figure is prevented from being continuously executed many times. It is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball is preferentially executed, and the player can sufficiently obtain the benefit of easily entering the game ball into the second start winning opening in the probability change state or the short time state.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of a background image used in the battle mode or the like of this embodiment. 56 (A) is the background of “Sea 1” (the number of battle wins is 0) in FIG. 48 (B), and FIG. 56 (B) is the background of “Sea 2” (the number of battle wins is 1). FIG. 56C shows the background of “Sea 3” (the battle win count is 2). As shown in FIGS. 56 (A) to (C), beach umbrellas ("Sea 2") and palm trees ("Sea 3") are added to the background of "Sea 1" according to the number of battle wins. Go. In this way, an effect that the stage progresses according to the number of battle wins at the sea stage is executed. Further, when the number of battle wins is 3, the background of the mountain stage (“mountain 1”) shown in FIG. FIG. 56E shows the background of “mountain 2” (the number of battle wins is 4), and FIG. 56F shows the background of “mountain 3” (the number of battle wins is 5). As shown in FIGS. 56D to 56F, according to the number of battle wins, a lake (“mountain 2”) and a bird (“mountain 3”) are added to the background of “mountain 1”. In this way, even in the mountain stage, an effect that the stage progresses according to the number of battle wins is executed. When the number of battle wins is 6, the background of the cosmic stage shown in FIG. 56 (G) (“universe 1”) is obtained. FIG. 56 (H) is the background of “Universe 2” (7 battles), and FIG. 56 (I) is the background of “Space 3” (8 battles). As shown in FIGS. 56D to 56F, rockets (“Space 2”) and meteors (“Space 3”) are added to the background of “Space 1” according to the number of battle wins. In this way, even in the cosmic stage, an effect that the stage progresses according to the number of battle wins is executed. In this embodiment, when the “battle mode” falls to the “chance mode”, the background of the “battle mode” is inherited as it is. As shown in FIG. 56, since different backgrounds are prepared for each number of battle wins (0 to 8), the player recognizes the number of battle wins depending on which background is used in the “chance mode”. be able to.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display operation based on each battle effect pattern in the battle mode. FIG. 57 (A) shows a state before starting variable display in the battle mode. Here, the number of battle wins is 0, and the background character “Ocean 1” corresponding to 0 battle wins is the enemy character 1 ( CH1) is displayed.

  Here, when a variation pattern of battle win (for example, battle win A1) is received on the side of the production control board 12, the teammate character CH0 becomes an enemy by the production control CPU 120 as shown in FIGS. 57 (B) and (C). As shown in FIG. 57D, a battle effect for winning the character CH1 is executed, and a display indicating that the battle has been won is displayed, and the battle win count in the battle win count display area 5W is updated to “1”. Is done. After that, when the big hit gaming state ends, as shown in FIG. 57 (E), the background “sea 2” and the enemy character 2 (CH2) corresponding to the number of battle wins being one are displayed. Switch.

  Then, when the battle control variation pattern (for example, battle win A1) is received on the side of the effect control board 12, as shown in FIGS. 57 (F) and (G), the effect control CPU 120 causes the friend character CH0 to become an enemy. As shown in FIG. 57 (H), a battle effect for winning the character CH2 is executed, and a display indicating that the battle has been won is displayed, and the battle win count in the battle win count display area 5W is updated to “2”. Is done. Thereafter, when the jackpot gaming state is reached and the jackpot gaming state ends, as shown in FIG. 57 (I), the background “sea 3” and the enemy character 3 (CH3) corresponding to the number of battle wins being two are displayed. Switch.

  At this time, when a variation pattern of battle loss (for example, battle loss A1) is received on the side of the effect control board 12, as shown in FIGS. 57 (J) and (K), the friend character CH0 is made enemy by the effect control CPU 120. A battle effect for defeating the character CH2 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 57 (L), a display indicating that the battle has been defeated is displayed. Thereafter, the two-round jackpot gaming state is entered, and when the two-round jackpot gaming state is completed, a transition is made to a “chance mode” as shown in FIG. In this “chance mode”, the background “sea 3” of “battle mode” is taken over. As described above, even in the “chance mode”, the player can recognize the number of battle wins depending on which of the backgrounds. Here, according to the setting of the big hit variation pattern type determination data 133I shown in FIG. 11D, when the number of battle wins is 2, 5, or 8 (in the case of enemy characters 3, 6, 9), In the case of “3 big hits”, it always becomes an effect of defeating the battle as shown in FIGS. 57 (J) to (L) and falling to “chance mode”. On the other hand, when the number of battle wins is other than 2, 5, or 8 due to the setting of the big hit variation pattern type determination data 133H shown in FIG. Relief effects are executed at the rate of “Battle Mode”. As described above, the continuation ratio of the “battle mode” when the big hit type is “third big hit” is varied depending on the number of battle wins and the enemy character. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect as if the enemy character is strong or weak. In “Chance Mode”, the background of “Battle Mode” is inherited. However, if you switch from “Normal Mode” to “Chance Mode” without going through “Battle Mode”, the number of battle wins is 0. The “chance mode” effect may be executed according to the background shown in FIG. 56 (A).

  In the example of the display operation as described above, the enemy characters used in the “battle mode” are made different according to the number of battle wins. On the other hand, as another example of the effect operation in the battle mode, the enemy character is made different depending on whether the variable display is executed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. Also good. That is, when the special symbol variable display result by the first special symbol display device 4A is “big hit”, a battle effect is executed in which the enemy character and the teammate character corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A fight. Further, when the variable symbol display result of the special symbol display device 4B is “big hit”, a battle effect is executed in which the enemy character and the teammate character corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B fight. The player can recognize in which special symbol display device the variable display result is “big hit” due to the difference in enemy characters. During the “battle mode”, the variable display result of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is “lost”, or the variable display result of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is “lost”. Depending on whether it is, the effect may be executed in different effect modes. As described above, in order to make the enemy character different depending on which special symbol display device is used to perform variable display, which special symbol display device variably displays in the process of step S585 shown in FIG. Different enemy characters may be determined depending on whether or not is executed. Further, when the special symbol game is executed by the first special symbol display device 4A and when the special symbol game is executed by the second special symbol display device 4B, the big hit variation pattern type determination data, the big hit In the processing of S272 to S276 shown in FIG. 33, the special pattern game is executed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Depending on whether or not is executed, a different variation pattern may be determined. Alternatively, the ally character may be made different depending on whether the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B performs variable display. In other words, when the special symbol variable display result by the first special symbol display device 4A is “big hit”, a battle effect is executed in which the ally character and the enemy character corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A fight. When the variable display result of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is “big hit”, a battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B fight is executed. The player can recognize in which special symbol display device the variable display result is “big hit” due to the difference in the teammate character. Alternatively, the action mode of the teammate character may be made different depending on whether the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B performs variable display. As an example, when the variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, a battle effect in which the teammate character moves in a motion mode predetermined as “weak attack” is executed. Further, when variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B is executed, a battle effect is performed in which the teammate character operates in a motion mode predetermined as “strong attack”.

  58 to 65 show an example of a display operation in which enemy characters are made different depending on which special symbol display device executes variable display in the battle mode. In the following display operation examples, the background is omitted. However, as shown in FIGS. 48A and 56, the background may be switched according to the number of battle wins. 58 (1) to 58 (12) show fluctuations until the big hit gaming state is reached in the normal mode. For example, in FIG. 58 (2), the decorative symbols start to change in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5 L, 5 C, and 5 R provided in the display area of the image display device 5. It shows that. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (3), the decorative symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. Also, as shown in FIG. 58 (4), the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. As shown in FIG. 58 (5), the decorative symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C. That is, the fluctuations in FIGS. 58 (2) to (5) show the fluctuations in non-reach loss in the normal mode. Similarly, FIGS. 58 (6) to (7) also show non-reach loss variations. If there is a hold storage here, then, as shown in FIG. 58 (8), the variation of the decorative symbol starts again in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Is done. When the variable display result is “big hit”, as shown in FIGS. 58 (9) and 58 (10), “7” is displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. ”Indicating the number“ ”is stopped and displayed, and a reach mode is obtained. Thereafter, a reach effect is displayed to display the character “reach” as shown in FIG. 58 (11), and the reach mode is displayed again as shown in FIG. 58 (12). Go to (1) or FIG. 59 (7).

  When the display of FIG. 58 (12) is made and the big hit type is “first big hit” or “second big hit”, as shown in FIG. 59 (1), the big hit combination (in this example, “7”). Combination) is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59 (2), for example, it is displayed that the number of round games executed in the big hit gaming state is 7 rounds. Here, as one of the promotion effects, after the screen is cut and displayed as shown in FIG. 59 (3), it is displayed that the number of rounds is 15 as shown in FIG. 59 (4). For example, the “first big hit” variation pattern type determination data 133A shown in FIG. 10A and the “second big hit” variation pattern type determination data 133B shown in FIG. It suffices if the variation pattern for executing (promotion effect) is set to be selectable. Here, since the promotion effect is in the big hit gaming state, the variation pattern may be common regardless of the presence or absence of the promotion effect. The execution timing of the promotion effect is not limited to the big hit game state, but may be executed at the end of the variable display or at the end of the big hit game state (during ending). Further, it may indicate that the number of round game executions is 15 rounds depending on the type of jackpot symbol (which symbol number is). Alternatively, if the big hit gaming state is only the two round big hit state and the 15 round big hit state, the promotion effect for notifying that the number of executions of the round game increases may not be executed. In addition, when the jackpot type is “first jackpot” and a fixed decoration pattern of a normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the decoration pattern, after the jackpot gaming state ends, such as during the jackpot gaming state A promotion effect for notifying that the state is surely changed may be executed. In this case, even if the jackpot type is “second jackpot”, an effect (promotion failure effect) that is not informed that the probabilistic state is informed is executed, although an effect similar to the promotion effect is executed. Also good. Thereafter, a round game is executed in the 15 round big hit state, and when it is displayed that the big hit game state has ended as shown in FIG. 59 (5), if the big hit type is “first big hit”, then FIG. As shown in 59 (6), a display indicating that the mode is shifted to the battle mode is displayed. Thereafter, the effect mode shifts to the battle mode. If the big hit type is “second big hit”, the display as shown in FIG. 59 (5) is followed by the display indicating the shift to the chance mode as shown in FIG. 59 (10). Thereafter, the production mode shifts to the chance mode.

  When the display of FIG. 58 (12) is made and the type of jackpot is “third jackpot” or “fourth jackpot”, as shown in FIG. 59 (7), a combination of two rounds jackpot (in this example, “ 7 ”,“ 8 ”and“ 7 ”) are displayed. Thereafter, for example, an image of a bomb is displayed as shown in FIGS. 59 (8) and (9), and after the effect that the bomb explodes, an indication to shift to the chance mode is displayed as shown in FIG. 59 (10). Is done. At this time, the round game in the two round big hit state is executed, and then the effect mode shifts to the chance mode. Further, there may be a pattern in which the bomb shown in FIG. 59 (8) does not explode. In that case, the mode may not be shifted to the chance mode. In this case, the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed may be a combination similar to the 2-round jackpot combination such as “7”, “6”, “7”, or the same combination as the 2-round jackpot combination.

  In the battle mode of this display operation example (for example, after FIG. 59 (6)), as shown in FIG. 60 (1), the friend character CH0 and the enemy character CH1-1 corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A are displayed. The enemy character CH1-2 corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B is displayed, and an effect by these characters is executed. When the first special symbol display device 4A changes, as shown in FIGS. 60 (2) and 60 (3), the image display device 5 produces an effect in which the teammate character CH0 and the enemy character CH1-1 face each other. At this time, as one of the pre-battle notice effects, an impending notice effect (for example, notice A) is executed. Such a pre-battle announcement effect is similar to (same as) the start of the battle effect (for example, FIGS. 60 (2) and (7)). By setting it as such an effect, the expectation that a battle effect will be performed (it will be a big hit) can be raised. In the changing special symbol display area 5I, a color corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A is displayed. In the battle mode, in addition to the effects by the character, for example, the decorative pattern display area 5M provided in the upper left part of the display area of the image display device 5 also executes the change of the decorative pattern of three-digit numbers “1” to “8”. Is done.

  Subsequently, when the second special symbol display device 4B changes, as shown in FIG. 60 (4), after the teammate character CH0 once moves toward the enemy character CH1-2, as shown in FIG. 60 (5). Moreover, in the image display device 5, the teammate character CH0 and the enemy character CH1-2 face each other. At this time, a notice effect (for example, notice B, FIG. 60 (4)) in which the teammate character CH0 moves toward the enemy character is executed as one of the pre-battle notice effects. In the changing special symbol display area 5I, a color corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B is displayed. In the case of “big hit” during the battle mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 60 (6), a pre-battle notice effect (for example, notice C) that displays a shooting star at the same time as the teammate character CH0 moves toward the enemy character is executed. As shown in FIGS. 60 (7) and 60 (8), the battle effect by the teammate character CH0 and the enemy character CH1-1 is started. Here, for example, as a post-battle notice effect, an effect in which a cherry blossom snowflies is performed as shown in FIG. 60 (9), and the silhouette of the foot of the character is displayed as shown in FIG. 60 (10). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (11), the teammate character CH0 is displayed as part of the post-battle notice effect. The post-battle notice effects in FIGS. 60 (9) to (11) are, for example, notice D1. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 60 (12), 61 (1), and (2), it is displayed that the battle has been won and “first big hit” or “second big hit” is achieved. In addition, as a result of winning the battle, the number of battle wins displayed in the battle win number display area 5W provided in the upper right part of the image display device 5 is updated and displayed as “one battle win”. At this time, the number decorative pattern is also a jackpot combination (in this example, a combination of “7”).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 61 (3) to (5), a big hit gaming state is set. Here, for example, as a promotion effect in the big hit game state, a promotion effect in which the number of executions of the round game is promoted from 7 rounds to 15 rounds as shown in FIGS. 61 (6) and (7) is executed. In other words, the variation pattern type determination data of the first special symbol display device 4A may be set so that a variation pattern for executing such an effect (promotion effect) can be selected. When the big hit gaming state is only the two round big hit state and the 15 round big hit state, the promotion effect for notifying that the number of executions of the round game increases may not be executed. Alternatively, depending on which of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is “big hit”, the ratio determined to execute the promotion effect is different. You may make it let. In this case, for example, in the variation pattern type determination data or the variation pattern determination data, the assignment of the random value to the variation pattern for executing the promotion effect may be made different according to the variation special figure designation buffer value or the like. After the big hit gaming state is continued as shown in FIG. 61 (8), when 15 rounds are over, the big hit gaming state as shown in FIG. 61 (9) is completed, or the battle as shown in FIG. 61 (10) is completed. It is displayed that the mode is continued, and thereafter, the battle mode is continued (for example, the effect as shown in (1) of FIG. 60 is continued). In the subsequent battle mode, for example, an effect using the enemy character CH2-1 and the enemy character CH2-2 corresponding to the number of battle wins being one is obtained. Further, the background also becomes a background (for example, the background shown in FIG. 56B) corresponding to the number of battle wins being one.

  On the other hand, after the silhouette of the character's legs is displayed as shown in FIG. 60 (10), the enemy character CH1-1 may be displayed as part of the post-battle notice effect as shown in FIG. 62 (1). is there. The post-battle notice effects in FIGS. 60 (9) to 60 (10) and FIG. 62 (1) are, for example, notice D2. After that, a variation pattern (for example, variation pattern of battle loss A1 shown in FIG. 15A) that falls from the battle mode with any of the second big hit, “third big hit”, or “fourth big hit” If there is, as shown in FIGS. 62 (2) to (4), a display indicating that the battle has been lost (mode end effect) is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 62 (5), a display for shifting to the chance mode (mode end effect). ) And the mode is shifted to the chance mode (for example, the mode shifts to an effect as shown in (11) of FIG. 59). In the post-battle notice effect, the continuation rate of the battle mode differs depending on whether the ally character or the enemy character is displayed (see FIG. 25B), so the player pays attention to such an after-battle notice effect. 62 (1) to (4) are examples when the change is executed in the first special symbol display device 4A, and when the change is executed in the second special symbol display device 4B. This is an effect using the enemy character CH1-2. 62 (2) to (5), the mode end effect indicating the end of the battle mode is performed when the big hit (third or fourth big win) is reached (at the end of variable display). The present invention is not limited to this, and it may be performed during execution of variable display, during the big hit gaming state, or after the big hit gaming state ends. Moreover, you may carry out over these plurality.

  In addition, after the display indicating that the battle was defeated as shown in FIG. 62 (4), another effect (mode continuation effect) in which the doctor character is displayed and the injection is performed as shown in FIGS. 63 (1) and (2). For example, there is a case where an effect that the ally character CH0 is restored is executed. If the big hit type is “third big hit” and the fluctuation pattern continues (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the battle loss A2 shown in FIG. 15A), after the display shown in FIG. 63 (2), FIG. As shown in (3), the display in which the battle mode is continued is performed together with the display of the confirmed decorative symbol that is a combination of the two round big hits. Further, when the big hit type is “first big hit” and the fluctuation pattern for executing the relief effect (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the battle win A3 shown in FIG. 15A), the display shown in FIG. After that, it becomes a big hit gaming state of “first big hit”. If the effect that the teammate character CH0 revives as shown in FIGS. 63 (1) and 63 (2) is made a relief effect dedicated to the battle winning variation pattern, and this effect is executed, it is a big hit with 100% play. It may be “first big hit” or “second big hit”.

  In the chance mode (for example, after FIG. 59 (10), for example), as shown in FIG. 59 (11), for example, the teammate character CH0 performs an effect of searching for an enemy character. In this chance mode, it is unknown to the player whether the time is short or the state is probable. In the chance mode, in the same manner as in the battle mode, along with the effects by the character, for example, a decorative pattern of three-digit numbers “1” to “8” in the decorative symbol display area 5M provided in the upper left part of the display area of the image display device 5 or the like. Variations are also performed. In the chance mode, the remaining number of fluctuations in the chance mode is counted down in a chance mode fluctuation display area 5N provided in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 59 (12), every time a change is executed, the number of changes in the chance mode is counted down (30 times → 29 times). In the chance mode, when it is “big hit”, as shown in FIGS. 64 (1) to (4), for example, the teammate character CH0 finds the door and performs the effect of opening the door.

  Here, when the big hit type is “first big hit”, as shown in FIG. 64 (5), a display for finding the enemy character CH1-1 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 64 (6), “big hit”. Is displayed, and the decorative pattern of numbers is also a jackpot combination (in this example, a combination of “7”). The enemy character displayed in FIG. 64 (5) is the enemy character CH1-1 corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A when the variation is in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B. Is the enemy character CH1-2 corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B. After that, it becomes a big hit gaming state (for example, by performing effects as shown in (4) to (10) of FIG. 61), and then shifts to the battle mode.

  Also, when the big hit type is “second big hit”, the same display as when the big hit type is “first big hit” is performed until the big hit gaming state is reached, but after the big hit gaming state is ended , Just go to chance mode. Alternatively, when the big hit type is “second big hit”, the display is the same as when the big hit type is “third big hit” or “fourth big hit”, and then the big hit gaming state is set. You may move to chance mode after finishing. When the big hit type is “third big hit” or “fourth big hit”, as shown in FIG. 64 (7), a display indicating that nothing was found is displayed. As shown in FIG. 64 (8), “unfortunately” ”And a combination of two numbers of big numbers (in this example,“ 7 ”,“ 8 ”,“ 7 ”). At this time, a two-round jackpot gaming state is executed, and then the chance mode continues (for example, transition to an effect as shown in (11) of FIG. 59).

  In the chance mode, when the number of changes in the chance mode (for example, 30 times) ends, for example, an effect of closing the door is executed as shown in FIGS. At this time, when the big hit type at the time of the chance mode transition is “third big hit”, as shown in FIG. Is displayed to move to. It should be noted that the effects of the intense hot mode may be those in which some of the effects are different so that they can be distinguished from the chance mode, for example, the background color is different from the chance mode. For example, the background color shown in FIG. 56 may be different. By shifting from the chance mode to the intense hot mode, the player can recognize that it is in a probable state. On the other hand, when the big hit type at the time of the chance mode transition is “second big hit” or “fourth big hit”, the mode shifts from the short time state to the normal state, and the effect mode also returns to the normal mode. In the intense hot mode, the effect mode changed from the chance mode is preferably a simple change such as changing the background color as shown in FIG. By simplifying the change in this way, the moving image data itself can use common data between modes, and the storage capacity can be reduced. Also, in the case of another production mode, the current production mode may be displayed in the mode display area 5O.

  Further, the player can select from a plurality of teammate characters to be used in the battle mode by operating the operation button 30 (jog dial) at an arbitrary timing (for example, during execution of variable display on the image display device 5). An effect may be prepared. FIG. 66 shows an example of the display operation when the teammate character can be selected by operating the operation button 30. In this case, for example, during the variable display of the battle mode as shown in FIG. 66 (1), the character “selection chance” shown in FIG. 66 (2) indicating that the ally character can be selected is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (3), a prompt to operate the operation button 30 (jog dial) is displayed. After that, FIG. 66 (4) selectable characters (here, the friend characters CH01, CH02, and CH03 can be selected), the remaining time that can be selected, and the like are displayed. At this time, the character selection pointer 5P is displayed on the image display device 5. The character selection pointer 5P operates in conjunction with the jog operation. That is, when the jog is rotated clockwise, the character selection pointer 5P operates in the order of the teammate character CH01, the teammate character CH02, and the teammate character CH03. When the jog is rotated counterclockwise, the character selection pointer 5P operates in the order of the teammate character CH03, the teammate character CH02, and the teammate character CH01. Then, for example, the time for selection is determined to be the teammate character selected at the end. Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (5), the selected character is enlarged and displayed. In the subsequent battle mode, as shown in FIG. 66 (6), an effect by the selected teammate character CH02 is executed. When the operation button 30 is pressed, the ally character selected by the character selection pointer 5P may be determined.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 66, the ratio (reliability) in which the battle mode continues (becomes “first big hit”) varies depending on which enemy character the selected teammate character fights. An effect control pattern may be determined.

  That is, the effect control CPU 120 stores which team member character is being selected based on the operation detection signal from the operation button 30. If any one of the teammate characters CH01, CH02, and CH03 is being selected, the type of the teammate character, which special symbol display device changes, and whether the jackpot type is “first jackpot”, The determination ratios of enemy characters fighting in battle effects are varied based on whether they are “second jackpot”, “third jackpot”, or “fourth jackpot”. For example, based on the setting shown in FIG. 67, the effect control CPU 120 may determine the corresponding effect control pattern in the process of step S585 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (A), in the case of the variation of the first special symbol display device 4A, if the teammate character CH01 is being selected, the jackpot type is “first jackpot”, The enemy character CH1-1a is easily selected (enemy character CH1-1a: 80%, enemy character CH1-1b: 20%). On the other hand, the enemy character CH1-1b is likely to be selected in response to the jackpot type being one of “second jackpot”, “third jackpot”, or “fourth jackpot” (enemy character CH1-1a: 20%, enemy character CH1-1b: 80%). Therefore, if the teammate character CH01 is being selected, the reliability with which the battle mode continues when the battle effect that fights the enemy character CH1-1a is executed increases. If the teammate character CH02 is being selected, the enemy character CH1-1a is likely to be selected in response to the jackpot type being “first jackpot” (enemy character CH1-1a: 60%, enemy character CH1). -1b: 40%). On the other hand, the enemy character CH1-1b is likely to be selected in response to the jackpot type being one of “second jackpot”, “third jackpot”, or “fourth jackpot” (enemy character CH1-1a: 40%, enemy character CH1-1b: 60%). Even when the teammate character CH02 is selected, the reliability of the battle mode continues to increase when a battle effect that fights the enemy character CH1-1a is executed. However, the allocation is as extreme as when the teammate character CH01 is selected. Because there is no, the reliability decreases.

  On the other hand, if the teammate character CH03 is being selected, the enemy character CH1-1b is likely to be selected corresponding to the jackpot type being “first jackpot” (enemy character CH1-1a: 20%, Enemy character CH1-1b: 80%). On the other hand, the enemy character CH1-1a is likely to be selected in response to the jackpot type being one of “second jackpot”, “third jackpot”, or “fourth jackpot” (enemy character CH1-1a: 80%, enemy character CH1-1b: 20%). Therefore, when the teammate character CH03 is selected, when the battle effect that fights the enemy character CH1-1b is executed, the reliability that the battle mode continues increases.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (B), in the case of the variation of the second special symbol display device 4B, if the teammate character CH01 is being selected, the jackpot type is “first jackpot”, The enemy character CH1-2a is easily selected (enemy character CH1-2a: 80%, enemy character CH1-2b: 20%). On the other hand, the enemy character CH1-2b is likely to be selected in response to the jackpot type being one of “second jackpot”, “third jackpot”, or “fourth jackpot” (enemy character CH1-2a: 20%, enemy character CH1-2b: 80%). Therefore, if the teammate character CH01 is being selected, the reliability with which the battle mode continues when the battle effect for fighting the enemy character CH1-2a is executed increases. If the teammate character CH02 is being selected, the enemy character CH1-2a is likely to be selected in response to the jackpot type being “first jackpot” (enemy character CH1-2a: 60%, enemy character CH1). -2b: 40%). On the other hand, the enemy character CH1-2b is likely to be selected in response to the jackpot type being one of “second jackpot”, “third jackpot”, or “fourth jackpot” (enemy character CH1-2a: 40%, enemy character CH1-2b: 60%). Even when the teammate character CH02 is selected, the reliability of the battle mode continues to increase when a battle effect that fights the enemy character CH1-2a is executed. Because there is no, the reliability decreases.

  On the other hand, if the teammate character CH03 is being selected, the enemy character CH1-2b is likely to be selected in response to the jackpot type being “first jackpot” (enemy character CH1-2a: 20%, Enemy character CH1-2b: 80%). On the other hand, the enemy character CH1-2a is likely to be selected in response to the jackpot type being one of “second jackpot”, “third jackpot”, or “fourth jackpot” (enemy character CH1-2a: 80%, enemy character CH1-2b: 20%). Therefore, when the teammate character CH03 is selected, the reliability that the battle mode continues becomes high when the battle effect that fights the enemy character CH1-2b is executed. As described above, by determining the effect pattern based on the character selected by the operation button 30, an effect as if the player was involved in the continuation rate of the battle mode becomes possible, and the game performance is improved. In this case as well, when different types of enemy characters are used according to the number of battle wins, setting data as shown in FIGS. 67A and 67B is prepared for each battle win number. Good. Moreover, you may vary the determination ratio of the enemy character which fights by a battle effect depending on whether variable display is performed by 4A of 1st special symbol display apparatuses, and the 2nd special symbol display apparatus 4B. That is, in the setting data shown in FIGS. 67 (A) and 67 (B), the ratio that each enemy character is determined according to the type of teammate character and the type of jackpot is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A. The effect control pattern may be determined so as to be different depending on whether the variable display is executed on the second special symbol display device 4B.

  Here, as an example, the example in which the effect control CPU 120 determines the battle effect in the battle mode has been described. However, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not to execute other effects and the effect pattern. . On the main board 11 side, the CPU 103 does not determine the presence / absence or variation pattern of the reach mode, determines only the variation time, and creates an effect control pattern including the presence / absence or variation pattern of the reach mode on the effect control board 12. On the side, the effect control CPU 120 may determine, for example, in the process of step S510.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, when the “fourth big hit” occurs during the “battle mode”, the mode always shifts to the “chance mode”. For example, as shown in FIG. As described above, the “chance mode” may be shifted to a predetermined rate (80%), and the “battle mode” may be continued at a predetermined rate (20%). In addition, when the “battle mode” continues, the mode shifts to the “normal mode” when the time saving state is ended (for example, after 30 times of fluctuation). In this case, in the mode flag switching setting executed in step S312 in the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 35 or step S329 in the big hit end processing shown in FIG. 36, the mode flag switching setting data shown in FIG. Instead of 200, mode flag switching setting data 200A, 202 as shown in FIGS. 68B and 68C may be used. FIG. 69 shows an example of the display operation in the image display device 5 in this case. In FIGS. 69 (1) and 69 (2), in the battle mode, the “fourth big hit” is performed, and an effect of defeating the battle is executed. Thereafter, in the setting example shown in FIG. 68, an effect that the teammate character CH1 is restored is executed at a rate of 20% as shown in FIG. 69 (3), and the battle mode is continued. In addition, as shown in FIG. 69 (4), a display indicating that the battle has been lost is displayed at a rate of 80%, and the mode is shifted to the chance mode. In addition, as shown in FIG. 69 (3), when the battle mode is continued, when the time reduction state ends, the normal mode is shifted to the normal mode by the same effect as the transition from the chance mode to the normal mode. That's fine.

  In this way, even if the “fourth big hit” occurs during the battle mode, the battle mode may continue, so that the player's expectation can be maintained, and the game due to having entered the chance mode Can be reduced. In addition, the battle mode does not always continue, and sometimes it becomes the chance mode, so the production is sharp.

  In this embodiment, a battle effect pattern (battle effect pattern) is determined as a variation pattern on the main board 11 side. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 may determine the battle effect pattern on the effect control board 12 side including the character type. In this case, only the special figure variable display result and the special figure variation time are determined on the main board 11 side in the battle mode. For example, as the probability variation state, the probability variation control is continuously performed, and the highly accurate and high base state in which advantageous release control is performed to increase the possibility that the game ball enters the second start winning opening, and the probability variation control is performed advantageously. A high-accuracy low-base state in which opening control is not performed is provided, and as a short-time state, the special figure variation time is shortened, and the low-accuracy high-base state in which advantageous opening control is performed and special figure variation time are shortened. The low-accuracy and low-base state, which is not advantageous open control, is provided, and any of these states (high-accuracy high-base state, high-accuracy-low base state, low-accuracy-high base state, low-accuracy-low base state) Different fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) determination data is prepared corresponding to whether or not the fluctuation time is determined on the main substrate 11 side. Then, the production control pattern corresponding to the variation time and the special figure variable display result is determined on the production control board 12 side.

  In this case, the management of the effect mode and the count of the number of battle wins are not executed on the main board 11 side, but are executed on the effect control board 12 side. For this purpose, a mode flag is provided on the side of the effect control board 12, and a process of switching the mode flag according to the big hit type or the number of fluctuations (a process corresponding to step S312 or step S329) may be executed. . In addition, a battle victory number counter is provided on the side of the effect control board 12, and processing for updating the battle victory number counter in accordance with the number of jackpots in the battle mode (processing corresponding to step S301 and step S313) is executed. What should I do? Furthermore, when it becomes “third big hit” during the battle mode, the determination as to whether or not to continue the battle mode is also executed on the side of the effect control board 12. And what is necessary is just to make it determine the battle production pattern corresponding to the determination result. In determining whether or not to continue the battle mode, the continuation rate of the battle mode is varied according to the number of battle wins (count value of the battle win counter).

  The battle effect in this case is to change the effect mode according to the operation of the operation button 30. Furthermore, the operation mode of the operation button 30 is varied for each battle effect pattern. Part of the effect control in such a case may be appropriately combined with the effect control in the above-described embodiment without departing from the spirit of the invention.

  70 and 71 illustrate an example of determination data stored in the ROM 121 when the effect control CPU 120 determines a battle effect pattern on the effect control board 12 side. The determination data in this case includes battle effect pattern type determination data 175A to 175C and 176A to 176C shown in FIG. 70, and battle effect pattern determination data 177 shown in FIG. In this operation example, the effect control CPU 120 determines the battle effect pattern type based on the battle effect pattern type determination data, and then details based on the battle effect pattern determination data corresponding to the determined battle effect pattern type. A battle production pattern is determined. For example, a battle effect pattern type is determined based on the battle effect pattern type determination data, and an effect (promotion effect) in which the number of rounds per jackpot is promoted based on the battle effect pattern determination data corresponding to the battle effect pattern type The presence and type of other productions such as the production (relief production) of winning after pretending that the battle is defeated are determined. Note that the processing content in the effect control CPU 120 is an example, and any part of the processing content by the CPU 103 on the main board 11 side is executed by the effect control CPU 120 on the effect control board 12 side. Anything is acceptable. For example, the count of battle wins may be executed by the CPU 103 or the like on the main board 11 side, and an effect control command for notifying the number of battle wins may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. On the side of the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 may determine the battle effect pattern based on the number of battle wins notified from the main board 11.

  The battle effect pattern type determination data 175A to 175C and 176A to 176C shown in FIGS. 70A to 70F are displayed when the variable display result is “big hit” during the battle mode (when the battle effect is executed). In addition, according to the jackpot type, the battle effect pattern type is selected from a plurality of types (battle wins A1, B1, C1, A2, B2, C2, battle loss A1, B1, A2, B2, and continuation of battle A1, B1, A2, and B2) are determination data referred to for determination. When the variable display is executed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the battle effect pattern type determination data 175A to 175C is used, and when the variable display is executed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the battle effect pattern type is used. Determination data 176A to 176C are used. Each of the battle effect pattern type determination data 175A to 175C and 176A to 176C is selected as determination data according to the big hit type and which special symbol display device corresponds to the big hit.

  Specifically, in the battle effect pattern type determination data 175A to 175B and 176A to 176B, the big hit types in the “battle mode” are “first big hit”, “second big hit”, “third big hit”, “first Depending on whether it is “4 big hits” and which special symbol display device is a big hit, the battle effect pattern type determination random number SR5 wins the battle A1, B1, C1, A2, B2, It consists of determination data to be assigned to one of the battle effect pattern types of C2, battle loss A1, B1, A2, B2. The battle effect pattern type determination data 175C and 176C are used when the big hit type in the “battle mode” is “third big hit” and it is determined that the battle mode is to be continued, and the battle effect pattern type determination data is used. For example, the determination random number data SR5 is assigned to any one of the battle effect pattern types of the battle continuation A1, B1, A2, and B2. In this way, depending on which of the multiple types of jackpot types in the “battle mode”, it is possible to determine different battle effect pattern types, and the ratio determined for the same battle effect pattern type is different. be able to. Moreover, the battle effect pattern type determined by which special symbol display device performs variable display can be varied. Furthermore, when the big hit type in the “battle mode” is “third big hit” and it is determined that the battle mode is to be continued, it is possible to determine the battle effect pattern type for continuing the battle mode. In this embodiment, three types of battle effects (Battle A, Battle B, Battle C) with different operation modes of the operation buttons 30 are prepared, and Battle A (Battle Win A1, A2, Battle Loss A1, A2, The battle continuation A1 and A2 battle execution pattern types) are set to be easily determined at the time of “third big hit” and “fourth big hit” (particularly when “fourth big hit”). (Battle wins B1, B2, battle loss B1, B2, battle continuation B1, B2 are executed in the battle effect pattern type) when “first big hit”, “second big hit” (particularly “second big hit” The battle C (executed with the battle effect pattern types of the battle wins C1 and C2) is set to be determined only at the time of “first big hit” and “second big hit”. It is. As described above, since the ratio of which jackpot is different depends on which battle effect pattern type, the player pays attention to the battle effect. Note that the assignment of the random value SR5 in the battle effect pattern type determination data 175A to 175C and the battle effect pattern type determination data 176A to 176C is the same, but even if the assignment of the random value SR5 is different. Good. For example, the assignment of the battle win A2 in the case of “first big hit” and “second big hit” in the battle effect pattern type determination data 176A, the “first big hit”, “second” in the battle effect pattern type determination data 175A. It may be less than the allocation of the battle win A1 in the case of “big hit”. By doing so, when the first special symbol display device 4B becomes “first big hit” and “second big hit”, the first special symbol display device 4A makes “first big hit” and “second big hit”. The battle effects of battle B and battle C can be more easily executed than in the case where That is, depending on whether the variable display is executed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the ratio at which the battle effect is determined as one of a plurality of types can be varied. .

  The battle effect pattern determination data includes battle effect pattern determination data 177 shown in FIG. The data 177 for determining the battle effect pattern is referred to in order to determine the battle effect pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the random value SR6 for determining the battle effect pattern according to the determination result of the battle effect pattern type. Data for determination. The battle effect pattern determination data 177 includes a random effect value SR6 for determining the battle effect pattern according to the battle effect pattern type, and a plurality of types of battle effect patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display result is “big hit”. It consists of data for determination to be assigned to any of the above.

  In battle effect pattern determination data 177, battles A1-1 to A1-6, A2-1 to A2-6 are battle effect patterns in which the battle effect of battle A is executed, and battles B1-1 to B1-6 and B2 are executed. -1 to B2-6 are battle effect patterns in which the battle effect of Battle B is executed, and battles C1-1, C1-2, C2-1, and C2-2 are battle effects in which the battle effect of Battle C is executed. It is a pattern. Moreover, battle A1-1, A1-2, B1-1, B1-2, C1-1, C1-2, A2-1, A2-2, B2-1, B2-2, C2-1, C2-2 Is a battle effect pattern in which the teammate character wins the enemy character. Battles A1-3, A1-4, B1-3, B1-4, A2-3, A2-4, B2-3, B2-4 This is a battle performance pattern that the character loses against the enemy character. Battles A1-5, A1-6, B1-5, B1-6, A2-5, A2-6, B2-5, B2-6 are This is a battle effect pattern in which an effect such as reviving after losing a character is executed and the battle mode continues. And battle A1-2, A1-4, A1-6, B1-2, B1-4, B1-6, C1-2, A2-2, A2-4, A2-6, B2-2, B2-4 , B2-6, C2-2 are battle effect patterns for executing the other effects described above during variable display, during the big hit game state, or after the big hit game state. When these battle performance patterns are determined, for example, an effect in which the number of executions of the round game is promoted from 7 rounds to 15 rounds, an effect in which the battle mode continues even if the round 2 is a big hit, and the like are executed. On the other hand, in the battles A1-1, B1-1, C1-1, A2-1, B2-1, C2-1, etc., other effects are not executed. Thus, in this operation example, a battle effect pattern with a similar battle effect is set as one battle effect pattern type. When adding the battle effect pattern within the same battle effect pattern type or changing the setting of the rate of occurrence of the battle effect pattern, it is only necessary to change the setting of the random value SR6 in the battle effect pattern type. It is possible to shorten the development time of game machines and the setting time of random numbers. Also, when adding a battle effect mode and adding a battle effect pattern type, or changing the setting of the occurrence rate of the battle effect mode (battle effect pattern type), the battle effect pattern type determination Since only the setting of the numerical value SR5 has to be changed, the development time of the gaming machine and the setting time of the random value can be shortened.

  FIG. 72 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a battle effect setting process executed when a big hit is made during the battle mode as the process of step S523 shown in FIG. 46 in this operation example. In this battle effect setting process, first, the battle mode continuation determination is executed (step S600). Specifically, when the big hit type is the third big hit, based on the number of battle wins, it is determined whether the battle mode is continued or falls using the determination data shown in FIG. In the judgment data of FIG. 72 (B), when the number of battle wins is 2, 5 or 8, the 100% battle mode falls, otherwise the 80% battle mode is continued and the 20% battle mode falls. It is supposed to be. The data for determination shown in FIG. 72 (B) is an example, and for example, the number of battle wins that increase the fall rate may be one place. Further, if the battle win valence is a predetermined number of times, the fall rate does not have to be 100% if it is easy to fall and other times it is easy to continue. Subsequent to the processing of step S600, the determination result of step S600, the big hit type and the first start opening prize are obtained from the battle effect pattern type determination data 175A to 175C and 176A to 176C shown in FIGS. The designated command reception flag, the second start opening winning designation command reception flag, and the like are checked, and determination data corresponding to the big hit type and the variation special figure is set (step S601). Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random value SR5 for determining the battle effect pattern type is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S602). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR5 extracted in step S602, the battle effect pattern type is determined by referring to the battle effect pattern type determination data set in step S601 (step S603). FIG. 71 shows determination data for determining one of a plurality of types of battle effect patterns based on the determination result of the battle effect pattern type after the battle effect pattern type is determined in step S603. The corresponding determination data is selected from the battle effect pattern determination data 177 and set (step S604). Specifically, for example, the address of the battle effect pattern determination data is stored in association with the determination value of each battle effect pattern type determination data, and the address is set in the determination data pointer. Subsequently, a random value SR6 for determining a battle effect pattern is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S605). Then, based on the random value SR6 for determining the battle effect pattern extracted in step S605, the battle effect pattern determination data set in step S604 is referred to, and the battle effect pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types. (Step S606). In the process of step S523, an effect control pattern corresponding to the battle effect pattern determined in this way and the number of battle wins (enemy character, background) may be determined.

  FIG. 73 shows a display operation of each battle effect pattern in the battle mode of this operation example. FIG. 73A shows a state before starting variable display in the battle mode. Here, an ally character CHA and an enemy character CHB corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A are displayed. In this example, the change in the number decoration pattern by the decoration pattern display area 5M is omitted, but the change in the number decoration pattern may be omitted during the battle mode. In the battle effect setting process shown in FIG. 73 (A), when the battle effect pattern (for example, battle A1-1) for executing the battle effect of battle A is determined, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), the operation button An instruction to press 30 once is displayed. When the battle effect pattern for executing the battle effect of battle B (for example, battle B1-1) is determined, an instruction to repeatedly hit the operation button 30 is displayed as shown in FIG. 73 (C). In addition, when the battle effect pattern (for example, battle C1-1) for executing the battle effect of battle C is determined, an instruction to turn the operation button 30 (jog dial) is displayed as shown in FIG. 73 (D). Is done. Thus, in the battle effects of battle A to battle C, the operation mode of the operation button 30 is varied. When a button operation corresponding to the instructions in FIGS. 73 (B) to (D) is performed within a predetermined button effective period during the variation time, the display in FIGS. 73 (B) to (D) is switched, A battle effect having a different effect mode from the case where no button operation is performed is executed. Thus, in this operation example, it is possible to execute an effect as if the player was involved in the battle effect.

  After that, depending on whether the jackpot type is "first jackpot", "second jackpot" (battle win), or "third jackpot", "fourth jackpot" (battle losing, battle continuation) A message indicating that the battle has been won or defeated, or that the battle mode will continue is displayed. For example, after the display of FIG. 73 (B) when the big hit type is “first big hit” and the battle effect pattern of battle A1-1, as shown in FIG. 75 (F) corresponding to the button operation. In addition, an indication that the teammate character CHA attacks with a “hand grenade” is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (G), a display indicating that the attack is successful is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 75 (H), a display indicating that the battle mode is continued after winning the battle is displayed. Even when the jackpot type is “second jackpot” and the battle effect pattern of the battle A1-1, as shown in FIGS. 75 (F) and 75 (G), a display indicating that the attack is successful is performed. Instead of the display in which the battle mode continues as shown in FIG. 75 (H), a display indicating that 15 rounds are in the big hit state may be performed, and the mode may be shifted to the chance mode after the end of the big hit gaming state. Further, after the display of FIG. 73 (B) when the big hit type is “first big hit” or “second big hit” and the battle effect pattern of battle A1-2, FIG. After the display of F), as shown in FIG. 75 (I), the attack by the “hand grenade” is deviated and the attack has failed, and the “hand grenade” is displayed as shown in FIGS. Is reflected on the wall to display a successful attack. As described above, in the effect of the battle effect pattern of the battle A1-2, another effect (here, the relief effect) different from the battle effect pattern of the battle A1-1 is executed.

  FIG. 74 is a timing chart for explaining the switching of effects by the operation of the operation button 30. In the battle effect as shown in FIG. 73, when there is an instructed button operation, the display for instructing the button operation (display as shown in FIGS. 73B to 73D) is terminated. That is, it is necessary to switch the production at an arbitrary timing when the button operation corresponding to the instruction is performed. For example, in the same battle effect pattern, the button is operated immediately before the end of the button effective period as shown in FIG. 74A, and the button immediately after the start of the button effective period as shown in FIG. 74B. When the operation is performed, the time for executing the battle effect corresponding to the button operation is different because the variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is constant. Therefore, in this operation example, an effect control pattern for effects corresponding to such a difference in time is prepared. For example, an effect control pattern for displaying an image repeatedly at a predetermined cycle in order to adjust time may be prepared. As an example, a video showing a battle result (win or loss) or an attacking video may be repeatedly displayed. When the video indicating the battle result is repeatedly displayed, the result can be displayed at a timing corresponding to the button operation, so that it is possible to prevent a time lag from the button operation to the effect result. In the process of step S546 of the decorative symbol variation process shown in FIG. 49, the effect control pattern corresponding to the remaining variation time is switched. FIG. 74C is a timing chart when there is no button operation. When there is no button operation, the display instructing the button operation is terminated at the timing when the button valid period ends, and the effect is switched. In the example of FIG. 74 (C), the battle effect displayed after the button effective period is an effect mode different from those of FIGS.

  As another example of the battle effect pattern in such an operation example, one that can select an effect mode by operating the operation button 30 may be prepared. FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a battle effect pattern in which an effect mode in the battle mode can be selected. FIG. 75A shows a state before starting variable display in the battle mode. Here, an ally character CHA and an enemy character CHB corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A are displayed. In this example, when the battle effect is started in response to the big hit, a display indicating that the weapon can be selected with the operation button 30 (jog dial) is displayed as shown in FIG. 75 (B). . Thereafter, in response to the player operating the jog dial (rotating operation), the cursor C moves as shown in FIGS. 75 (C) and 75 (D), and the player operates the operation button 30 after a predetermined time has elapsed. “Grenade” is selected. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (E), a display for instructing to press the button once is displayed, and as shown in FIG. ”Is displayed to attack. When the big hit type is “first big hit”, as shown in FIG. 75 (G), an indication that the attack is successful is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 75 (H), the battle is won and the battle mode is continued. Displayed. After that, it becomes a big hit gaming state. Even when the jackpot type is “second jackpot”, a display indicating that the attack is successful is performed as shown in FIG. 75 (G), but instead of the display shown in FIG. Is displayed.

  Further, as one of the battle effect patterns, an effect (relief effect) in which the attack succeeds after pretending that the attack has failed may be prepared. For example, after the display of FIG. 75 (F), as shown in FIG. 75 (I), a display that the attack by the “grenade” has deviated and the attack has failed is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 75 (J) and (K). The “hand grenade” is reflected on the wall to display a successful attack. 75 (A) to (G) as described above (for example, battle A1-1 in FIG. 71) and battle effects patterns (FIGS. 75 (A) to (F) and (I) to (K)) ( For example, the battle A1-2) in FIG. 71 may be included in the same battle effect pattern type (for example, battle win A1). When the big hit type is “third big hit” or “fourth big hit” (battle loss), after the display as shown in FIG. The production to defeat is performed.

  Further, as yet another example in this operation example, when the operation button 30 is not operated in a battle effect, a display defeated by the battle is displayed, the battle mode is ended in a pseudo manner, and the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times. An effect that returns to the battle mode later may be executed. With such effects, the player's willingness to participate in the game (operation of the operation button 30) can be enhanced. For example, when the jackpot type is “first jackpot”, as shown in FIG. 76, in the battle effect pattern similar to FIG. 75, the button operation (sequential fire) indicated by the display in FIG. If not, an effect is given in which an attack from the enemy character CHB is received and the battle is defeated as shown in FIGS. 76 (E) to 76 (H). Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (I), the effect mode is switched to the normal mode (internally, the probability variation state). After the variable display of the predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) in the normal mode is finished, an effect as if the game has been restored to the battle mode is performed as shown in FIG. In FIG. 76I, the mode may be switched to the chance mode instead of the normal mode. In that case, the effect screen in FIG. 76I may be a chance mode screen. Further, after FIG. 76 (H), the mode may be switched to the normal mode as shown in FIG. 58 (2) or the chance mode as shown in FIG. 59 (11). Then, after the variable display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) is completed, the mode may be restored to the battle mode as shown in FIG. Moreover, you may make it perform the production | presentation which complete | finishes a battle mode artificially at a fixed ratio irrespective of whether the operation button 30 was operated by the battle production.

  As described above, in the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 32, after it is determined in step S231 that the second reserved memory number is “0”, the first reserved memory number is “0” in step S236. If the second reserved memory number is other than “0” in step S231, the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is the first special game. The special symbol display device 4A is executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol. In addition, when the time reduction flag is on corresponding to the probability change state or the time reduction state due to the setting of the general map display result determination data 139 shown in FIG. Also, it becomes easier for a game ball to enter (start prize) in the second start prize opening. In the big hit type determination data 131 shown in FIG. 8, the big hit types are “first big hit” and “third big hit, regardless of whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is“ 1 ”or“ 2 ”. After the game is determined to be a big hit gaming state, the special transition ratio that becomes a probable change state becomes constant. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the big hit type is determined as either “first big hit” or “second big hit” and controlled to the 15 round big hit state. The multi-round determination ratio becomes larger than the multi-round determination ratio when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”. In addition, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, a small round non-special decision that becomes a short-time state after determining the big hit type as “fourth big hit” and controlling to the two round big hit gaming state The ratio is smaller than the small round non-special determination ratio when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1” (specifically “0”).

  Therefore, in the special gaming state such as the probability variation state, the probability variation state ends when the big hit type is determined as “fourth big hit” and becomes the two round big hit state, compared to the normal gaming state such as the normal state. Thus, the possibility of a short time condition thereafter is reduced. Then, for example, in the probability variation state, the big hit type is “fourth big hit” and the two round big hit state is reached, and the big hit gaming state is finished with almost no payout, and the probability variation state is finished and the time saving state is reached. The possibility of becoming lower is reduced. On the other hand, in the probable state, the big hit type is “second big hit”, and after the big hit gaming state ends, it becomes a short-time state, but in the round game in the 15 round big hit state, there is a possibility of obtaining a lot of balls Will increase. This means that, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the multi-round non-special decision that becomes a short-time state after the big hit type is determined as “second big hit” and controlled to the 15 round big hit gaming state It can also be derived from the fact that the ratio is larger than the multi-round non-special determination ratio when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”. In this way, by increasing the possibility that the player will have an opportunity to get a ball even when the probability change state ends, preventing an extreme decline in the game interest when the probability change state ends, and improving the game interest be able to.

  In the case of “battle mode” by the setting of the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination data 138B shown in FIG. 17B, the first special symbol display device when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”. The special figure change time in the special figure game using the first special figure in 4A is shown as the special figure using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2". Set a time longer than the special figure fluctuation time in the figure game. In addition, according to the setting of the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination data 138C shown in FIG. 17C, the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1” even in the “chance mode” or “extremely hot mode”. In this case, the special symbol variation time in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is shown as the second special symbol display device 4B when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”. Is set to a time longer than the special figure variation time in the special figure game using the second special figure. As a result, immediately after the end of the jackpot gaming state that has become a probable change state or a short time state, the special game based on the fact that the short time flag is on before the special figure game according to the first special figure has been continuously executed many times. In a state where the game ball can easily enter the second start winning port, and the game ball can easily enter the second start winning port in the probability change state or the short time state, or a special game according to the second special drawing. However, it is possible for the player to sufficiently obtain the benefit of being executed in preference to the special figure game according to the first special figure.

  When the “battle mode”, “chance mode”, or “extremely hot mode” is set by the setting of the general map display result determination data 139 shown in FIG. 18, the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”. In some cases, the special figure change time in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is set to a time longer than the normal figure change times TH1 and TH2 when the time flag is off. Set. As a result, immediately after the end of the jackpot gaming state that has become a probable change or short-running state, the special figure game started during the jackpot gaming state is surely made before the special chart game according to the first special figure is finished once. In addition, it is possible to start a normal game based on the fact that the time-short flag is on, so that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening, and the game is played in the second starting winning opening in the probability change state or the time-short state. It becomes possible for the player to sufficiently obtain the profits that the ball can easily enter and that the special figure game according to the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game according to the first special figure. .

  The CPU 103 determines the variation pattern type based on the variation pattern type determination data shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, and based on the variation pattern type, the detailed variation is determined based on the variation pattern determination data shown in FIGS. 14 to 17. It is configured to determine a pattern. With this configuration, when the variation pattern type is added or the occurrence rate is changed, only the setting of the random value MR4 of the variation pattern type determination data needs to be changed, so that the setting time can be shortened. In addition, when adding a detailed variation pattern or changing the occurrence rate, it is only necessary to change the setting of the random value MR5 of the variation pattern determination data, so the setting time can be shortened.

  In the process of step S265 shown in FIG. 33, if the effect mode is “normal mode”, the reach determination data 132A shown in FIG. 9A is set, while the effect modes are “battle mode” and “chance mode”. If it is one of the “super hot mode”, the reach determination data 132B shown in FIG. 9B is set, and the presence or absence of reach is determined in steps S268 and S269. Therefore, when the production mode is “battle mode”, it is always determined to be “no reach (non-reach loss)”. When the non-reach loss is determined, the variation pattern type is determined based on the variation pattern type determination data 135B that can be determined only for the non-reach variation pattern. During the “Battle Mode”, the player is in the 1st and 2nd big hits and is in the 15th round big hit state, the 3rd and 4th big hits in the 2nd round big hit state, Therefore, it is interested in whether the “battle mode” is continued or whether the “battle mode” is ended in any of the second to fourth big hits, and there is no interest in the loss that cannot be achieved. Therefore, you don't have to be interested in reaching in case of a loss. Therefore, in the “battle mode”, when the game is lost, it is determined that only “no reach” is achieved, so that the average variable display time at the time of the loss can be made shorter than that in the “normal mode”. It is possible to shorten the time until the process is executed. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of reach determination and variation pattern type determination at the time of loss in the “battle mode”.

  In the process of step S585 shown in FIG. 48A, the effect mode is “battle mode” by determining the effect control pattern according to the settings as shown in FIGS. 67A and 67B, for example. When the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is executed. An effect can be executed in a different effect mode. In this way, depending on which of the two special symbol display devices fluctuates, it is possible to produce effects in different production modes, and the game value of the big hit gaming state can be made different, so that the game has sharpness. Can do.

  As shown in FIG. 68, even when the big hit type is “fourth big hit” when the production mode is “battle mode”, the variation pattern of the battle mode continuation is determined at a constant rate, and the battle mode is continued. When the fluctuation pattern is determined, the “battle mode” is continued after the end of the two-round big hit state. In this way, even if the time is short, the “battle mode” is continued at a certain rate, making it difficult to recognize whether the state is the probability variation state or the short time state during the “battle mode”. Even after becoming, it is possible to maintain the expectation of being in the probability variation state, and to prevent the customer from leaving due to quitting the game when the probability variation control is no longer performed.

  After it is determined in step S305 shown in FIG. 35 that the state is a probability variation state or a time-saving state, it is determined in step S306 that the big hit type buffer value is “03” corresponding to the “fourth big hit”. In step S307, the probability variation time medium / short 2R non-probability variation flag is set to ON. Thereafter, based on the determination that the probability change time short / long 2R non-probability change flag is turned on in step S324 shown in FIG. 36, in the process of step S327, the first time limit upper limit number set in the process of step S325 ( For example, the upper limit number of times of the second time reduction (for example, “100”) larger than “30”) is set as the upper limit number of special figure games that can be executed in the time reduction state. Thus, when the big hit type is “fourth big hit” in the probability variation state or the short time state, the first short time upper limit number of times when the big hit type becomes “fourth big hit” in the normal state. A larger number of second time limit upper limit times is set. As a result, when the probability change state or the short-time state is reached, it becomes a two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state is not finished, the probability change state is reduced, and the probability change state ends. It is possible to prevent the gaming interests from drastically deteriorating.

  As shown in FIG. 73, by preparing a plurality of battle performance patterns (for example, battles A1, B1, C1, etc.) with different operation modes of the operation buttons 30, variations can be made in the battle performance, and the game is monotonous Can be prevented, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the process of step S264 shown in FIG. 33, when the effect mode is “battle mode”, the table win setting (“first mode” in the “battle mode” indicates that the jackpot type is “first” according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. Depending on whether the number of times of “big hit” is a predetermined number (for example, any of 2, 5, or 8), one of different big hit variation pattern type determination data 133F to 133I is selected. Then, when the big hit type is “third big hit” and the number of battle wins is a predetermined number of times, it is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of the battle mode falling from “battle mode” to “chance mode”. As a result, it is possible to produce a clear effect according to the number of battle wins, and when playing for a long time (for example, when the big hit type is “first big hit” many times, etc.), Can be improved.

  In the process of step S583 shown in FIG. 48, the type and background of the enemy character are determined to be different according to the number of battle wins. Thereby, the player can recognize the magnitude of the possibility that the battle mode falls from “battle mode” to “chance mode” depending on the type of enemy character. In addition, it is possible to produce an effect that adds strength to the enemy character. This effect improves the expectation of continuation of the battle mode, thereby improving the fun of the game.

  In the process of step S301 shown in FIG. 35, when the big hit type is “first big hit” when the effect mode is “battle mode”, the battle win count value is incremented by one and updated. In the process of step S313, when the effect mode is switched to the “normal mode”, the battle victory count value is reset to “0”. As a result, after the production mode becomes “battle mode”, the number of battle wins is counted until the production mode becomes “normal mode”. It is easy to become and can improve the interest of the game.

  In the process of step S312 shown in FIG. 35, for example, by setting the mode flag switching setting data 201 shown in FIG. 37 (B), the probability variation flag is turned on, the rendering mode is “chance mode”, and a predetermined number of times (eg, “30”). When the special figure game of “)” is finished, the production mode shifts to the “super hot mode”. As a result, even if the production mode becomes “chance mode”, if the production mode is in a probable change state, the production mode is set to a production mode that is different from the time-short state such as “Intense Mode” and is different from the time-short state. The entertainment aspect of a game can be improved by setting it as a production | presentation aspect.

  As shown in FIG. 57, FIG. 60 to FIG. 62, etc., when the production mode is the “battle mode”, it is easy to determine whether or not the battle mode is continued depending on whether or not the teammate character CH0 has won the enemy character. Can be recognized.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (M), when the effect mode shifts from “battle mode” to “chance mode”, the background in “battle mode” is continuously displayed. That is, the production mode when the production mode becomes the “chance mode” is changed according to the number of battle wins in the production mode “battle mode”. As a result, it is possible to produce a clear effect based on the number of battle wins, improve the interest of the game when playing for a long time, and the player can also determine the number of battle wins when the production mode is “chance mode”. Can be recognized, and the fun of the game in the “battle mode” and “chance mode” can be improved.

  When the variation mode type to be “non-reach loss” is determined when the production mode is “battle mode”, the total pending storage is performed by setting the variation pattern type determination data 135B shown in FIG. If the number is 3 or less, the variation pattern type of the non-reach B1-1 including the variation pattern of the non-reach 5 depending on whether the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”; It is determined to be one of the non-reach B1-2 variation pattern types including the non-reach 6 variation pattern. If the total number of pending storages is 4 or more, the variation pattern type of the non-reach B1-3 and the non-reach B1 depending on whether the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”. -4 of the fluctuation pattern type, and when it is decided, the special figure fluctuation time T7 shorter than the special figure fluctuation times T5 and T6 in the non-reach 5 and non-reach 6 fluctuation patterns. , T8 is determined as the non-reach 7 or non-reach 8 variation pattern. Thus, by providing a plurality of “non-reach lose” variation patterns, it is possible to give a range of effects. In addition, it is possible to reduce invalid winnings by shortening the average fluctuation time when the total number of reserved storage is large (in the case of 4 or more).

  By the setting of the battle effect pattern type determination data 175A to 175C shown in FIGS. 70A to 70C and the setting of the battle effect pattern type determination data 176A to 176C shown in FIGS. The battle effect pattern type (battle effect pattern) is determined at different ratios depending on which of the multiple types such as “first big hit” to “fourth big hit” is determined. This makes it possible to vary the degree of expectation as to which of the multiple types of jackpot types depends on which battle effect is executed, and draws the player's interest in which battle effect is executed Can improve the interest of the game.

  The battle effect pattern may be determined by executing the battle effect setting process as shown in FIG. 72A on the effect control board 12 side by the effect control CPU 120 or the like. Thereby, the determination of the effect can be distributed to the main board 11 and the effect control board 12, and the processing burden on the main board 11 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIGS. 76 (B) to 76 (I), when the operation button 30 is not operated during the battle effect, the “battle mode” is ended in a pseudo manner. In this way, since it is possible to perform an effect that makes it appear disadvantageous if the operation button 30 is not operated, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game (operation of the operation button 30) and improve the interest of the game. . Further, even after temporarily finishing the “battle mode”, as shown in FIG. 76 (J), an effect of reviving the “battle mode” may be executed. Thereby, the unexpectedness of the production | presentation which a player recognizes that it is a probability change state can be improved, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, in the above embodiment, by using the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination data 138B and 138C shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C, the rendering mode is “battle” corresponding to the probability variation state or the short time state. When the mode is one of “Mode”, “Chance Mode”, or “Gekiatsu Mode”, the special figure change time in the special figure game using the first special figure is calculated in the special figure game using the second special figure. By setting the time longer than the special figure variation time, and using the common figure display result determination data 139 shown in FIG. 18, the rendering mode is “battle mode” and The special figure change time in the special figure game using the first special figure when the “chance mode” or the “super hot mode” is set, and the normal figure change time TH1 when the time flag is off, By setting a longer time than H2, the player so that is sufficiently benefit in probability variation state and time reduction state. On the other hand, only one of these settings may be performed. Even in this case, compared with the conventional case, the player can sufficiently obtain the profit in the probability variation state and the short time state.

  Alternatively, for the special figure game using the first special figure, the time reduction control for reducing the special figure variation time in the probability variation state or the short time state may not be performed. As an example, in the process of step S271 shown in FIG. 33, table data to be one of the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination data 135A to 135C is selected according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. With the setting shown in FIG. 77A, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination data 135A is selected regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, the special figure variation time in the special figure game using the first special figure is the same regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal state, the short time state, or the certainty state, and the time reduction control is not performed.

  Alternatively, for the special figure game using the first special figure, when the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than the predetermined number, the time reduction control may not be performed even in the probability changing state or the short time state. As an example, in the process of step S271 shown in FIG. 33, table data to be one of the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination data 135A to 135C is selected according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. With the setting shown in FIG. 77 (B), when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1” and the second reserved memory number is “1” or less, the rendering modes are “battle mode”, “chance mode”, and Even in any one of the “super hot mode”, the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination data 135A is selected. At this time, the special figure variation time in the special figure game using the first special figure is the same regardless of whether the game state is the normal state, the short time state, or the probability variation state, and the time reduction control is not performed. .

  Thus, for the special game using the first special figure, the time variation control is not performed at all, or if the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than the predetermined number, the time variation control is not performed. Immediately after the end of the jackpot gaming state that has become a state or a time-saving state, the special-purpose game based on the fact that the time-saving flag is on can be started before the special-purpose game according to the first special drawing is continuously executed many times. The game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening. In this way, the player may be able to obtain a sufficient profit in the probability change state or the short time state.

  Alternatively, for the special figure game using the first special figure, when the probability change state or the short time state, the ratio of the special figure variation time set to be longer than that of the special figure game using the second special figure, You may increase more than the ratio set below the special figure fluctuation time in the special figure game using 2 special figures. As an example, the non-reach loss variation pattern determination data 138B shown in FIG. 18B is changed to that shown in FIG. 78A. Further, the non-reach loss variation pattern determination data 138C shown in FIG. 18C is changed to that shown in FIG. 78B. Here, in the setting of the non-reach loss variation pattern determination data 138B shown in FIG. 78A, the non-reach 5 variation corresponding to the special diagram variation time T5 corresponding to the special diagram game using the first special diagram. The random value MR5 is assigned such that the ratio determined for the pattern is larger than the ratio determined for the non-reach 6 variation pattern. The special figure fluctuation time T5 in the non-reach 5 fluctuation pattern is the special figure fluctuation time T7 in the non-reach 7 and non-reach 8 fluctuation patterns determined when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. , A time longer than T8 is set. In addition, in the setting of the non-reach loss variation pattern determination data 138C shown in FIG. 78 (B), the variation pattern of the non-reach 9 that becomes the special diagram variation time T9 corresponding to the special diagram game using the first special diagram. The random number value MR5 is assigned such that the ratio determined to be greater than the ratio determined for the non-reach 10 variation pattern. The special figure fluctuation time T9 in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach 9 is the special figure fluctuation time T11 in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach 11 and the non-reach 12 determined when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. , A time longer than T12 is set.

  In this way, for the special figure game using the first special figure when the probability variation state or the short-time state is set, the ratio that the special figure variation time is set longer than the special figure game using the second special figure is set. By increasing the ratio to be less than the special figure variation time in the special figure game using the second special figure, the first special figure immediately after the end of the big hit gaming state that has become the probable change state or the short time state. Before the special game according to is repeatedly executed a number of times, the normal game based on the fact that the time flag is on can be started, and the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening. In this way, the player may be able to obtain a sufficient profit in the probability change state or the short time state.

  In the above embodiment, in the special game state such as the probability change state, the big hit type is determined to be “fourth big hit” in comparison with the normal game state such as the normal state, and then it becomes the two round big hit state. The jackpot type determination data 131 shown in FIG. 8 and the like are set so as to reduce the possibility of being in a state. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “fourth big hit” in a special game state such as a probable change state, the game ball is paid out according to the winning of the game ball in the big winning opening in the round game in the two round big hit state. The number of winning balls may be larger than when the big hit type is “fourth big hit” in the normal gaming state such as the normal state. As an example, the first payout is specified as a payout number designation command for designating the number of payout of prize balls that are transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board when a game ball that has won a big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23. A number designation command and a second payout number designation command are prepared in advance. Here, the first payout number designation command is based on the detection of the winning ball in the big winning position in the two round big hit state when the big hit type is “fourth big hit” in the normal gaming state such as the normal state. This is a payout control command that designates the payout number as the first prize ball number (for example, “15”). The first payout number designation command is a common payout that designates the number of payout balls based on the winning detection at the big winning opening even in the big hit gaming state due to the jackpot type other than “fourth big hit”. It may be a control command. On the other hand, the 2nd payout number designation command is based on the detection of winning at the big winning opening in the 2 round big hit state in the special game state such as the probability changing state in which the big hit type is “fourth big hit”. Is a payout control command that designates the number of payouts to be a second number of premium balls (eg, “30”) that is greater than the number of first prize balls.

  In the winning ball process in step S18 shown in FIG. 29, when the big hit type is “fourth big hit”, the game state before the two round big hit state is the normal state It is determined whether it is in the probabilistic state or the short time state. At this time, if it is determined that the game is in the normal state, a setting for transmitting the first payout number designation command to the payout control board in response to the detection of the game ball by the count switch 23 is performed. Do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is either the probability variation state or the short time state, a second payout number designation command is sent to the payout control board in response to the game ball being detected by the count switch 23. Set to send to In the payout control board, if the payout control command transmitted from the main board 11 is the first payout number designation command, the payout control board performs processing and control for executing a payout operation for paying out the first prize ball. If it is the second payout number designation command, processing and control for executing a payout operation for paying out the prize balls of the second prize ball number are performed. As a result, when the probability change state or the short-time state is reached, it becomes a two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state is not finished, the probability change state is reduced, and the probability change state ends. It is possible to prevent the gaming interests from drastically deteriorating.

  Alternatively, when the big hit type is “fourth big hit” in a special game state such as a probable change state, the upper limit period during which the big winning opening is controlled to the open state in the round game in the two round big hit state is a normal state such as a normal state. The time may be longer than when the big hit type is “fourth big hit” in the gaming state. As an example, in the pre-opening process of the big winning opening shown in FIG. 30, when the round game of each round in the two round big hit state based on the fact that the big hit type is “fourth big hit”, It is determined whether the previous game state was a normal state, a probability variation state, or a short time state. At this time, when it is determined that the game is in the normal state, the upper limit period for opening the grand prize winning opening in each round game is set to the first period (for example, 0.5 seconds). On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is either the probability variation state or the short-time state, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening in each round game is the second period (which is longer than the first period) For example, 10 seconds). In addition, when the upper limit period is set to the second period, even if the elapsed time since the grand prize opening is opened in each round game is before the upper limit period is reached, the winning ball to the big prize opening When the number reaches a predetermined number (for example, “10”), the grand prize opening may be changed from the open state to the closed state, and the round game of that round may be ended. As a result, when it is in the probable change state or the short-time state, it becomes a two-round big hit state, and when the two-round big hit state does not become a probable change state, the game ball wins the big winning opening in each round game. Thus, the possibility that the player can get a ball is increased, the disadvantage received by the player is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the gaming interests from being extremely lowered when the probability change state ends.

  The setting of the variation pattern type determination data shown in FIGS. 10 to 13 and the variation pattern determination data shown in FIGS. 14 to 17 are examples, and can be changed without departing from the spirit of the present invention. .

  Further, in the reach determination data 132A and 132B shown in FIG. 9, only the presence / absence of reach is determined. However, in the reach determination data, the address of the variation pattern type determination data associated with the random value MR3. 33 may be set, and in the processes of steps S268 and S269 shown in FIG. 33, not only the presence / absence of reach but also the variation pattern type determination data to be used may be determined. Specifically, for example, in the reach determination data 132A, the reach-holding variation pattern type determination is performed in association with a value within the range of “1” or less and the random number MR3 in the range of “1” to “10”. An address of data to be referred to when the total reserved storage number of the data for use 134A is “3” or less is set in a predetermined pointer. Further, in the reach determination data 132A, the total reserved storage number is “1” or less and the random number MR3 is associated with a value in the range of “11” to “100”. An address of data to be referred to when the total number of reserved memories is “3” or less is set in a predetermined pointer. In step S273, the variation pattern type may be determined based on the variation pattern type determination data specified in step S268 and the random value MR4 extracted in step S272.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the effect mode is “battle mode”, the process of step S585 has been described as changing the type of the background and the enemy character according to the number of battle wins. On the other hand, either the background or the enemy character type may be made different. Further, other effects may be made depending on the number of battle wins.

  In the above embodiment, when the production mode is “battle mode”, the number of times that the big hit type is “first big hit” is counted as the number of battle wins, and in the “battle mode” corresponding to the number of battle wins. Different enemy characters and backgrounds were used, and according to the type of enemy character, when the jackpot type was “third jackpot”, the rate at which the “battle mode” continued was varied. That is, the enemy character and the background are changed in accordance with the number of “first big hits” during the “battle mode”, and the “battle mode” continuation rate is changed in the case of “third big hit”. It was. For example, (1) “first big hit” or “third big hit” during “battle mode”, (2) “second big hit” and “third big hit” during “battle mode” ”And“ 4th big hit ”and after“ Battle mode ”has changed to“ Chance mode ”(after falling), the number of times it has returned to“ Battle mode ”(the big hit type is“ 1st big hit ”in the short-time state) In response to the number of times added to (1), etc., the enemy character and background in “Battle Mode” are different, and the “Battle Mode” continuation rate when “3rd Big Hit” is reached You may make it differ.

  In the above embodiment, the background in the “battle mode” is taken over when the vehicle falls from the “battle mode” to the “chance mode”. On the other hand, you may make it produce the effect corresponding to the enemy character in "battle mode". Further, when the player falls from the “battle mode” to the “chance mode”, the production mode of the effects other than the background and the enemy character may be varied depending on the number of battle wins.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the effect mode is “battle mode” and the jackpot type is “third jackpot”, when the number of battle wins is a predetermined number (2, 5, 8), “chance” It was decided that the fluctuation pattern would fall into “mode”. On the other hand, you may make it fall into "chance mode" when the battle victory frequency is other than this. In the above embodiment, when the number of battle wins is a predetermined number (2, 5, 8), the player falls to the “chance mode” at a rate of 100%. In contrast, the “battle mode” may continue at a predetermined rate. To that end, the variation in which the “battle mode” continues in the variation pattern type determination data that is used when the number of battle wins is the predetermined number (2, 5, 8) in the case of the third big hit. A predetermined percentage of variable pattern types that can be determined may be assigned to the pattern.

  In the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 manages which of the effect modes by switching the mode flag on the main board 11 side. On the other hand, the effect mode may not be managed on the main board 11 side, but may be managed only on the effect control CPU 120 on the effect control board 12 side. In this case, the effect mode transition notification command as shown in FIG. 4A is not transmitted from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12. Also, the mode flag switching setting in step S312 shown in FIG. 35 or step S329 shown in FIG. 36 is not executed, and an alternative process is executed on the side of the effect control board 12. Further, in the process of step S265 shown in FIG. 33, the determination of the production mode is not performed and it is determined whether or not it is in the probability change state. If it is in the probability change state, the reach determination data 132B shown in FIG. When the probability variation state is not established, the reach determination data 132A shown in FIG. 9A is set. As described above, in the case of the probability variation state, the reach determination data 132B may be used not only in the battle mode but also in the chance mode or the intense hot mode so that the reach loss is not caused. Further, in the processes of steps S264 and S270 to S276, the variation pattern corresponding to which effect mode is selected is determined. However, the variation pattern type determination data shown in FIGS. 10 to 13 and FIGS. The variation pattern determination data shown in FIG. 17 is not used, and the variation pattern not depending on the production mode is determined. For example, the game state (probability change state, short-time state, normal state), which is the variable display result (big hit, reach lose, non-reach lose), and multiple change patterns corresponding to the total number of reserved memory Type determination data and variation pattern determination data are prepared, and instead of the processing in steps S264 and S270 to S276, processing for determining a variation pattern based on the determination data is executed. Then, on the side of the effect control board 12, the effect control pattern is determined based on which of the variation pattern and the effect mode determined on the main board 11 side. For example, when the big hit variation pattern in the probability variation state is received on the side of the production control board 12, the production control pattern is determined to be a battle win based on the production mode being the battle mode. Further, in the process of step S277, when a loss (non-reach loss) occurs in the probability change state, a fixed special figure change time (for example, 10 seconds) is determined. Then, on the side of the production control board 12, when the variation pattern of the loss in the probability variation state is received, the production control pattern is determined as the production control pattern that does not execute the battle production and does not reach based on the fact that the production mode is the battle mode. The As a result, reach is not achieved during the battle mode, and the loss variation can be executed with a constant fluctuation time. Therefore, useless effects in the loss variation during the battle mode can be omitted. In addition, even when the production mode is the chance mode or the intense hot mode, if the variation pattern of the loss in the probability variation state is received, it is not reached and the loss variation corresponding to the production mode of a certain variation time is determined. The Note that, in the process of step S277, even if a loss occurs in the probability variation state, a plurality of special figure variation times may be determined. Even in this case, the effect control pattern may be determined on the side of the effect control board 12 so as not to reach.

  Further, the variation pattern is not determined on the main substrate 11 side (the processing in steps S264 to S276 is skipped), only the variation time is determined in the processing in step S277, and the variation time command is transmitted to the effect control substrate 12. You may make it do. In this case, on the side of the effect control board 12, based on the change time command and the variable display result notification command, a decorative pattern change pattern (effect control pattern) or reach determination corresponding to the effect mode is executed. Good. In this case, the processing time may be simplified by keeping the fluctuation time at the time of loss constant. With this configuration, the processing burden on the CPU 103 on the main board 11 side can be reduced.

  In addition, a notice pattern for changing the effect mode may be prepared in response to the operation of the operation button 30. For example, the operation button 30 may be instructed in FIGS. 60 (2), 60 (4), and 60 (6) so that the teammate character CH1 moves toward the enemy character when the operation button 30 is operated. . As a result, a variety of notice effects can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Or you may make it change the production | presentation aspect of a promotion effect corresponding to operation of the operation button 30. FIG. For example, in the case of instructing continuous firing of the operation button 30 in FIG. 59 (2), FIG. 61 (5), and the like, the promotion may be executed as if the promotion was achieved by continuous firing. As a result, the promotion effects become diverse, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, the big hit variation pattern type determination data 133D and 133E shown in FIGS. 10D and 10E are common to the “chance mode” and the “super hot mode”. On the other hand, different determination data may be used depending on whether the mode is the “chance mode” or the “super hot mode”. Further, different determination data may be used depending on whether the state is the probability variation state or the time reduction state.

  In the above embodiment, depending on the setting of the pre-battle notice selection data 170 shown in FIG. 25A or the post-battle notice selection data 171 shown in FIG. The presence or absence of the notice and the notice pattern were determined at different ratios based on. On the other hand, the presence / absence of the notice and the notice pattern may be determined at different ratios based on the variation pattern. For example, even if the same “first big hit” and “second big hit” are provided, a variation pattern in which the teammate character CH1 wins and a variation pattern in which the teammate character CH1 wins back are provided, and a notice is given at different rates depending on which variation pattern is used. The presence or absence and the notice pattern may be determined. In addition, the presence / absence of the notice and the notice pattern are determined at different ratios depending on which of the fluctuation patterns for continuing the battle mode and the fluctuation pattern for shifting to the chance mode in the same “third big hit” and “fourth big hit”. You may do it. Further, the presence / absence of a notice or the notice pattern may be determined according to whether the change time pattern is a fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation time is shortened or not. For example, when the variation pattern is not shortened, the notice pattern may be determined to have a long presentation time.

  In the above embodiment, in the “battle mode”, a battle effect in which a predetermined teammate character and a predetermined enemy character battle each other is executed. On the other hand, a battle effect (for example, a battle effect in which the enemy character CH2 and the enemy character CH3 fight) may be executable. In this case, a variation pattern for “battle mode” and a pattern for executing a battle effect between enemy characters may be prepared as an effect control pattern. By making such an effect executable, the effect can be given unexpectedness and the gameability can be improved. Then, when such a battle effect between enemy characters is executed, the reliability of the big hit type ("first big hit" or "second big hit") from which the player can get a ball is determined as the reliability of the teammate character and the enemy. You may make it high compared with the time when the battle production with a character is performed. Further, the jackpot type ("first jackpot" or "second jackpot") that allows the player to get a ball at a decision ratio of 100% may be determined. Further, the battle mode may be continued at a rate of 100%.

  In the above embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display device 4A, a battle effect in which the enemy character and the teammate character corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A fight is executed. Further, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed by the second special symbol display device 4B, a battle effect in which the enemy character and the friend character corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B fight is executed. However, without following this rule, when variable display of the special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display device 4A, a battle effect that fights the enemy character corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B, or the second special symbol display When the variable display of the special symbol by the device 4B is executed, the battle effect for fighting the enemy character corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A may be executed at a small rate. Then, when such a law failure battle effect is executed, the reliability of the jackpot type ("first jackpot" or "second jackpot") from which the player can get a ball is determined according to the law. It may be higher than that. Further, it may be determined as a jackpot type (“first jackpot” or “second jackpot”) that allows the player to get a ball at a rate of 100%. Further, the battle mode may be continued at a rate of 100%.

  In the above embodiment, “battle mode”, “chance mode”, “super hot mode”, and “normal mode” are prepared as production modes, but the number of production modes is not limited to this. For example, the production modes may be only “battle mode” and “normal mode”. In this case, the “chance mode” and “quiet mode” in the above embodiment may be replaced with “battle mode” or “normal mode”. Further, other production modes may be provided.

  In the above-described embodiment, the explanation has been given assuming that four types of “first big hit”, “second big hit”, “third big hit”, and “fourth big hit” are prepared as the big hit types. However, the jackpot type is not limited to this. For example, only the “first big hit” as the probability variation big hit and the “fourth big hit” as the non-probable big hit may be used. Also, other big hit types may be provided. In addition, a plurality of big hits with different number of times after the end of the big hit gaming state with non-probable big hits are provided (for example, 10, 20, 30). You may make it perform the production | presentation whether a door closes and a time-short state is complete | finished or continues. In this case, the number of time reductions in the image display device 5 may be displayed by the count-up method instead of the count-down method.

  In the above embodiment, even if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2” by setting the big hit type determination data 131 shown in FIG. It explained that it might become a big hit state. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, it may be set so as not to be in the big hit state for two rounds. As an example, in the jackpot type determination data 131 shown in FIG. 8, “67” to “100” among the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination corresponding to the case where the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”. A value in the range may be assigned to “second big hit”. This makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening in the probability change state and the short time state, thereby reducing the possibility of a two round big hit state, while the 15 round big hit state. It is possible to increase the possibility that the player can get a ball when the variable display result becomes “big hit”, and to improve the interest of the game in the probable change state or the short time state.

  In the above embodiment, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2” by the setting of the big hit type determination data 131 shown in FIG. 8, the ratio that the big hit type is determined to be “fourth big hit” is as follows. It was described as 0. On the other hand, even when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the big hit type may be determined as “fourth big hit” at a predetermined rate. As an example, in the jackpot type determination data 131 shown in FIG. 8, a part of the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned corresponding to the case where the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”. Also good. Even in this case, the ratio of the big hit type corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value “2” corresponding to “2” and the big hit type corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value “1” is determined. It is good to set so that it may become less than the ratio determined to "4th big hit". This makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening in the probability variation state and the short time state than in the normal state, thereby reducing the possibility that the big hit type will be determined as “fourth big hit”. It is possible to increase the possibility that the player can get a ball when the state ends, and to prevent an extreme decrease in the gaming interest when the probability change state ends.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 executes the processing of steps S593 and S597 shown in FIG. 47, thereby executing the effect operation that becomes the notice effect during the variable display of the decorative symbols. “Left”, by determining whether or not to perform, and determining any one of a plurality of types of effect operations as a notice effect, and executing the processes of steps S503, S504, S506, and S509 shown in FIG. It has been described that the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined in the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an effect operation that becomes a notice effect during variable display of decorative symbols by a plurality of CPUs mounted on a plurality of control boards provided to control the effect operation, for example. The determination as to whether or not to execute, and the determination of any one of a plurality of types of effect operations as a notice effect and the determination of the decorative symbols to be stopped may be performed in a shared manner.

  As an example, a display control board 16 as shown in FIG. 79 is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5. On the display control board 16, a display control CPU 140, a ROM 141, a RAM 142, a random number circuit 143, and an I / O 144 are mounted. In this case, since the display control CPU 140 mounted on the display control board 16 executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, it is mounted on the effect control board 12 in the above embodiment. The displayed control unit 123 may not be provided. In the display control board 16, for example, the display control CPU 140 executes a program read from the ROM 141, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by displaying the effect image in the image display device 5. At this time, the display control CPU 140 reads fixed data from the ROM 141, the display control CPU 140 writes various variation data to the RAM 142 and temporarily stores them, and the display control CPU 140 stores the RAM 142 in the RAM 142. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading various variation data temporarily stored, display operation CPU 140 receiving operation for receiving input of various signals from outside of display control board 16 via I / O 144, display control CPU 140 I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the display control board 16 via O144 is also performed.

  In this case, the display control CPU 140 performs, for example, steps S593 and S597 shown in FIG. 47 based on a display control command from the effect control board 12 or an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the effect control board 12. By executing the process, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform an effect operation that will be a notice effect during variable display of decorative symbols, and to determine which of several types of effect actions that will be a notice effect. May be. Alternatively, the display control CPU 140 executes at least a part of the processes in steps S503, S504, S506, and S509 shown in FIG. You may make it determine all or one part of the decoration symbol stopped and displayed in symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. The display control CPU 140 may execute any part of the processes executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the above embodiment. Further, the display control CPU 140 may execute only display control, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute all of the determination of effect contents. The sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 may be connected to the effect control board 12 by wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal and an electrical decoration signal from the effect control board 12. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, a process for comprehensively controlling the effect operation may be executed by the effect control CPU 120.

  Further, the functions of the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are provided in the voice control circuit and the lamp control circuit mounted on the effect control board 12 so that independent control to be the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 is performed. The substrate may not be provided. In the above-described embodiment, in the configuration shown in FIG. 2, the sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are not equipped with a microcomputer including a control CPU and the like, but the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. Thus, processing for controlling various effects such as output control of sound and sound effects and lighting control of lamps, decoration LEDs, and the like is performed. On the other hand, in the configuration shown in FIG. 2, the processing executed by the CPU 120 for effect control in the above embodiment by the microcomputer mounted on the sound control board 13 or the microcomputer mounted on the lamp control board 14 is performed. Any part of them may be executed. Thus, when a plurality of control boards are provided to control the rendering operation, the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the control of the audio output operation in the speakers 8L and 8R. The process for determining the control content of various effect operations, such as the process for determining the content and the process for determining the control content of the lighting operation in the game effect lamp 9 or the like, is executed on any control board. Any combination may be used. The RTCM may be provided on any substrate.

  In the above-described embodiment, the total number of reserved memories at the start of change is notified by displaying a number in the change start hold number display area 5A. However, the notification method is not limited to this as long as the total number of reserved memories at the start of fluctuation can be notified. For example, the display of the hold decreased from the start winning memory display area 5H with the start of change may be notified by an effect such as moving to the change start hold number display area 5A, or may be notified by sound or a lamp. Also good.

  In the above embodiment, the special symbol display device for executing the special symbol game is such that only one of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is alternately changed. May fluctuate simultaneously.

  In the above embodiment, as the reach symbol determination data 162 shown in FIG. 23, a single one is used regardless of which special symbol display device is changed. On the other hand, a plurality of types of reach symbol determination data may be prepared corresponding to a plurality of special symbol display devices.

  In the above embodiment, one of the first reach pattern selection data to the ninth reach pattern selection data is selected based on the total number of reserved memories. However, the selection may be made on the basis of the number of reserved memories of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number.

  In the above embodiment, it has been described that in the start winning memory display area 5H, blue display is performed when the first start condition is satisfied, and red display is performed when the second start condition is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a round symbol is displayed when the first starting condition is satisfied, and a triangular symbol is displayed when the second starting condition is satisfied. The symbol may be displayed. Alternatively, a number indicating the number of times each of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied may be displayed in an identifiable manner. Further, a first start prize storage display area indicating that the first start condition is satisfied and a second start prize storage display area indicating that the second start condition is satisfied may be provided separately.

  In the above embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice pattern type in steps S593 and S597 shown in FIG. 47, the presence / absence of the notice effect and the decision of the notice pattern type and the notice pattern are all performed in one process. I was trying to decide. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the presence / absence of the notice effect may be determined first, and the type of the notice effect may be determined when it is determined that the notice effect is present.

  In the above embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol of the non-reach combination in step S503 shown in FIG. 44, the final stop symbol determination data 160A to 160C and the left and right appearance determination data 161 are displayed. In the above description, the determined decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are individually determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after determining the fixed decorative symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, the determined decorative symbol and the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas are displayed. You may make it determine the symbol difference with the fixed decoration symbol in 5C, 5R with reference to the data for predetermined | prescribed determination.

  In the above embodiment, as the variation pattern setting process in step S111 shown in FIG. 30, the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33 is executed regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. Explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied, a process different from each other is executed to determine whether to reach a reach mode, You may make it determine in any one of several types of fluctuation patterns. In this case, the process for determining the fluctuation pattern and the process for determining the fluctuation pattern are made different depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, while for the reach determination The numerical data indicating the random value MR3, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type, and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are common numerical values regardless of whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. Data should be used.

  For example, with regard to the determination process for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach mode, different processes are executed when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied. It may be. In this case, the process for determining whether or not the reach mode is set differs depending on whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, while the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for reach determination is used. Regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, the common numerical data may be used. Further, for example, instead of the processing in step S246 shown in FIG. 32 in the above-described embodiment, as the processing for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types, the case where the first start condition is satisfied and the second start condition Different processing may be executed depending on whether or not is established. In this case, the process for determining the big hit type is different depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, while the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is Regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, the common numerical data may be used.

  In the above embodiment, the variable display results are only “big hit” and “losing”, but “small hit” may be prepared. In this case, based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, the game state is controlled to the same small hit gaming state as the two round big hit gaming state, and after the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is changed. Do not break. Such a “small hit” is used as a hit for two rounds of big hit, and the open mode of the big prize opening is the same as in the case of two rounds of big hit. Therefore, since the player cannot distinguish whether it is a big hit or a “small hit” for two rounds, the chance of opening the big prize opening is increased without changing the big hit probability, and the player's expectation is improved. be able to.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the game state such as the probability change state or the time-short state can be controlled after the big hit gaming state based on the variable display result being “big hit”. In the probability variation state and the short-time state, it is described that the control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of the game ball entering the second start winning opening and easily establishing the second start condition. . However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the probability variation state, the probability variation control is continuously performed, and the advantageous release control that increases the possibility that the game ball enters the second start winning opening is performed. The high base state and the high probability low base state in which the probability variation control is performed but the advantageous release control is not performed may be included. Also, in the short-time state, a low-accuracy base state where the special figure fluctuation time is shortened and advantageous opening control is performed, and a low-accuracy low-base state where the special figure fluctuation time is shortened but advantageous opening control is not performed. May be included. As an example, depending on whether the jackpot type is “first jackpot” or “second jackpot”, control is made to either a high-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy-low base state after the big-hit gaming state ends. You may be made to do. As another example, depending on whether the big hit type is “first big hit” or “second big hit”, control is made to either the high-accuracy high base state or the high-accuracy low base state after the big hit gaming state is finished. The ratios to be used may be different from each other. Further, the big hit type may be increased and different control may be executed.

  Further, a special jackpot may be provided as a jackpot type. For example, with the same number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds), a plurality of big hits (for example, 1 open, 2 open, May be provided). In this way, even if the number of rounds is the same, the game value of each jackpot gaming state may be varied by varying the number of times of opening per round game. In this case, a special special winning opening different from the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 may be provided, and the special winning opening may be opened. In addition, when 16 rounds are released, a continuous effect may be executed to determine whether or not the big hit gaming state continues at intervals. Further, such a continuation effect may be executed only when the probability variation state or the big hit gaming state corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B.

  In the embodiment described above, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided in the display area of the image display device 5, and the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided. In the above description, it is assumed that one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed so that the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed on one predetermined effective line. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, three locations of “upper”, “middle”, and “lower” are provided. It is also possible that the decorative symbols can be stopped and displayed, and the finalized decorative symbols that will be the final stopped symbols are stopped and displayed on five or eight active lines.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in advance a computer It is possible to adopt a form distributed by pre-installing in a storage device such as a device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 16 ... Display control board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switches 22A, 22B ... Start port switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Operation button 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101, 121, 141 ... ROM
102, 122, 142 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124, 143... Random number circuits 105, 125, 144... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit 126 ... RTCM
140 ... CPU for display control

Claims (1)

Based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the game ball is won in the first start area provided in the game area, a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed. 1 variable display means and a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied after the game ball has won the second start area provided in the game area And a second variable display means for deriving and displaying the result, and when the display result of the identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result, control to a specific game state in which a round game advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times A gaming machine that
Normal variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of normal identification information that can identify each of them based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and for deriving and displaying a display result;
When the display result of the normal identification information becomes a predetermined display result determined in advance, the variable that changes the second start area from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to win to the second state in which the game ball is easy to win. Winning control means,
First hold storage means for storing variable display hold storage information within a predetermined upper limit storage number range in which the first start condition is not yet satisfied even though a game ball has won in the first start area; ,
A second on-hold storage means for storing variable display on-hold storage information within a range of a predetermined upper limit storage number, in which the second start condition is not yet established even though a game ball has won in the second start area; ,
Specific game state control means for controlling the specific game state to any one of a plurality of types of specific game states having different advantages for the player;
Whether to control to the specific gaming state based on the holding storage information read from the first holding storage unit or the second holding storage unit, and when controlling to the specific gaming state, the plurality of types of specific gaming state A pre-determining means for determining which of the control information is to be controlled before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed;
Variable display time determining means for determining a variable display time of identification information in the first variable display means or the second variable display means based on the determination result of the prior determination means;
Variable display control means for preferentially executing variable display of identification information in the second variable display means over variable display of identification information in the first variable display means;
An advantageous state control means for controlling the second starting area to an advantageous state in which the second starting area is likely to become the second state at a predetermined rate after the end of the specific gaming state;
When the pre-determining means determines to control to the specific gaming state based on the reserved storage information read from the second reserved storage means, the specific determination based on the reserved storage information read from the first reserved storage means Deciding to control to a specific gaming state having a high advantage for the player among the plurality of types of specific gaming states at a higher rate than when it is determined to control to the gaming state,
The variable display time determining means includes
When in the advantageous state, the variable display time of the identification information in the first variable display means is determined to be longer than the variable display time of the normal identification information in the normal variable display means when not in the advantageous state. And
In the advantageous state, when the storage information is not stored in the second storage device and the storage information is stored in the first storage device, the identification in the first variable display device is performed. The variable display time of information is determined to be longer than the variable display time of identification information in the second variable display means,
The advantageous state control means controls the advantageous state by improving the probability that the display result of the normal identification information is the predetermined display result.
A gaming machine characterized by that.